WO2021062679A1 - 一种通信方法和装置 - Google Patents

一种通信方法和装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021062679A1
WO2021062679A1 PCT/CN2019/109549 CN2019109549W WO2021062679A1 WO 2021062679 A1 WO2021062679 A1 WO 2021062679A1 CN 2019109549 W CN2019109549 W CN 2019109549W WO 2021062679 A1 WO2021062679 A1 WO 2021062679A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
terminal
candidate
target
pscell
signal quality
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2019/109549
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
孙慧明
严乐
曾清海
胡星星
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to PCT/CN2019/109549 priority Critical patent/WO2021062679A1/zh
Priority to CN201980097030.XA priority patent/CN113950853B/zh
Publication of WO2021062679A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021062679A1/zh

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/0005—Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
    • H04W36/0055—Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link
    • H04W36/0069—Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link in case of dual connectivity, e.g. decoupled uplink/downlink
    • H04W36/00692—Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link in case of dual connectivity, e.g. decoupled uplink/downlink using simultaneous multiple data streams, e.g. cooperative multipoint [CoMP], carrier aggregation [CA] or multiple input multiple output [MIMO]

Definitions

  • the embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communication technologies, and in particular, to a communication method and device.
  • a user equipment When a user equipment (User Equipment, UE) works in a dual connectivity (Dual Connectivity, DC) mode, the UE can simultaneously perform data transmission through a master node (Master Node, MN) and a secondary node (Secondary Node, SN).
  • Master Node, MN Master Node
  • Secondary Node, SN Secondary Node
  • Existing protocols support handover in DC scenarios, for example, the addition or change of primary and secondary cells (Primary Secondary Cell, PSCell) initiated by MN or SN, or the addition or change of SN (MN/SN initiated Conditional PSCell/SN Addition) /Change).
  • conditional handover CHO
  • the terminal may be The signal quality of the connection mode cannot be guaranteed, and the user experience is poor.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and device, which can ensure the signal quality of the terminal in the dual connection mode and improve the user experience.
  • a communication method includes: a terminal receives first information from a first access network device, where the first information includes a first signal quality parameter threshold and a trigger condition,
  • the trigger condition is a trigger condition for the terminal to change to the first target secondary node SN or add the first target SN; based on the first information, the terminal has a signal quality parameter in the first cell greater than or equal to the first signal quality parameter threshold.
  • the candidate SN that meets the trigger condition is determined as the first target SN; the first cell is a cell managed by the first access network device.
  • the terminal first determines the signal quality of the first cell before determining the target SN, and when the signal quality of the first cell is good, further determines the target SN, so that the terminal changes or adds the SN first.
  • the signal quality of a cell can be guaranteed, thereby ensuring the signal quality of the terminal in the dual-connection mode and improving the user experience.
  • the above method further includes: in a case where the signal quality parameter of the first cell is less than the first signal quality parameter threshold, the terminal performs one or more of the following: Item: The terminal determines the judgment to stop the addition or change of the condition SN; the judgment of the addition or change of the condition SN includes the terminal judging whether at least one candidate SN satisfies the trigger condition; or the terminal ignores the auxiliary of the at least one candidate SN Cell group SCG configuration; or, the terminal ignores the trigger condition; or, the terminal deletes the SCG configuration of the at least one candidate SN; or, the terminal deletes the trigger condition.
  • the terminal when the signal quality of the first cell is poor, performs one or more of the following: the terminal determines the addition or change of the stop condition SN; or, the terminal ignores or deletes at least one candidate SN SCG configuration; or, the terminal ignores or deletes the trigger condition, so as to avoid changing the conditional SN or adding the conditional SN when the signal quality of the first cell is poor, causing the terminal's signal quality in dual connection mode to not be guaranteed , The problem of poor user experience.
  • the The method further includes: the terminal determines the candidate SN meeting the trigger condition as the target MN, and the terminal releases the first access network device; or the terminal determines the candidate SN meeting the trigger condition as the target MN, and , The aforementioned terminal switches the aforementioned first access network device to the target SN.
  • a candidate SN with better signal quality can be determined as the target MN, so as to ensure that the signal quality of the target MN connected to the terminal is good to improve data
  • the transmission efficiency is improved, and the user experience is improved.
  • the above method further includes: the terminal receiving a first message from the first access network device, the first The message is used to instruct the terminal to add or change the SN; the first message includes the SCG configuration of the second target SN; the above-mentioned terminal stops the conditional SN addition or conditional SN change process, and executes the SN addition or SN change process .
  • the terminal when the terminal performs the process of conditional SN addition or conditional SN change, if the first access network device initiates the addition of traditional SN or SN change, the terminal will stop the process of conditional SN addition or conditional SN change , Perform the traditional (unconditional) SN addition or SN change process. That is, the priority of adding or changing the traditional SN is higher than the priority of adding or changing the conditional SN.
  • the above method further includes: in the case that the above terminal successfully accesses the second target SN, the terminal deletes at least SCG configuration of a candidate SN. Based on this solution, when the terminal successfully accesses the target SN in the traditional SN addition or the SN change, the terminal can delete the SCG configuration of at least one candidate SN in the conditional SN change or conditional SN addition process.
  • a communication method includes: a first access network device determines a first signal quality parameter threshold, and the first signal quality parameter threshold is used by a terminal to determine a first signal quality parameter threshold.
  • the signal quality of the cell is a cell managed by the first access network device; the first access network device sends first information to the terminal, and the first information includes the first signal quality parameter threshold and A trigger condition, which is a trigger condition for the aforementioned terminal to change to the target secondary node SN or to add the target SN.
  • the first signal quality parameter threshold is sent to the terminal, so that the terminal first determines the signal quality of the first cell before determining the target SN, and if the signal quality of the first cell is good, then The target SN is further determined, so the signal quality of the first cell before the terminal changes or adds the SN can be guaranteed, thereby ensuring the signal quality of the terminal in the dual connection mode and improving user experience.
  • the above method further includes: the first access network device sends a first message to at least one candidate SN respectively, and the first message is used to request the candidate SN to be the terminal Allocating radio resources, the first message includes indication information of conditional SN addition or conditional SN change; the first access network device receives a second message from the candidate SN, and the second message includes the secondary cell group allocated by the candidate SN SCG configuration.
  • the first access network device can reuse existing messages and send an SN addition request message to the candidate SN, but the SN addition request message includes conditional addition or change Instructions.
  • the above-mentioned first message may also be a conditional SN addition request message.
  • the foregoing method further includes: the foregoing first access network device separately sends a third message to the first candidate SN, and The third message is used to instruct the first candidate SN to release the SCG configuration of the first candidate SN, and the first candidate SN is an SN other than the target SN among the at least one candidate SN. Based on this solution, by sending a third message to candidate SNs other than the target SN among at least one candidate SN, requesting the candidate SNs other than the target SN to release the SCG configuration allocated to the terminal, thereby saving wireless resources of the candidate SN.
  • a third aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a communication method, the method includes: a terminal receives first information from a first access network device, the first information includes a first signal quality parameter threshold and a trigger condition, The trigger condition is a trigger condition for the terminal to change to the first target primary and secondary cell PSCell or to add the first target PSCell; based on the first information, the terminal has a signal quality parameter in the first cell greater than or equal to the first signal quality parameter In the case of the threshold value, the candidate PSCell that meets the trigger condition is determined as the first target PSCell; the first cell is a cell managed by the first access network device.
  • the first access network device sends the threshold value of the first signal quality parameter to the terminal, so that the terminal first determines the signal quality of the first cell before determining the target PSCell, and the terminal determines its connection status.
  • the signal quality of the first cell is good, further determining the target PSCell can ensure the signal quality of the terminal in the dual connection mode and improve the user experience.
  • the terminal changes to the first target PSCell it may be intra-SN PSCell Change, or inter-SN PSCell Change.
  • the method further includes: in the case that the signal quality parameter of the first cell is less than the first signal quality parameter threshold, the terminal performs one of the following or Multiple items: the terminal determines the judgment to stop the addition or change of the PSCell condition; the judgment of the conditional PSCell addition or change includes the terminal judging whether at least one candidate PSCell meets the above trigger condition; or the terminal ignores the configuration of the at least one candidate PSCell Or, the terminal ignores the trigger condition; or, the terminal deletes the configuration of the at least one candidate PSCell; or, the terminal deletes the trigger condition.
  • the terminal when the signal quality of the first cell is poor, performs one or more of the following: the terminal determines the stop condition to determine the addition or change of PSCell; or, the terminal ignores or deletes the configuration of at least one candidate PSCell Or, the terminal ignores or deletes the trigger condition, so as to avoid changing the conditional PSCell or adding the conditional PSCell when the signal quality of the first cell is poor, causing the terminal's signal quality in the dual connection mode to not be guaranteed, and the user The problem of poor experience.
  • the aforementioned at least one candidate PSCell belongs to a cell managed by a second access network device, and the second access network device is Before the terminal changes to the first target PSCell, the secondary node SN of the terminal in dual connectivity communication.
  • the above-mentioned PSCell change may be intra-SN PSCell Change (intra-SN PSCell Change).
  • the The method further includes: the terminal determines the second access network device to which the candidate PSCell that meets the trigger condition belongs as the target MN, and the terminal releases the first access network device; or, the terminal meets the trigger condition.
  • the second access network device to which the candidate PSCell belongs is determined as the target MN, and the terminal switches the first access network device to the first target SN.
  • the second access network device to which the candidate PSCell with better signal quality belongs can be determined as the target MN, thereby ensuring that the target MN connected to the terminal is The signal quality is better to improve data transmission efficiency and enhance user experience.
  • the above method further includes: the terminal receiving a first message from the first access network device, the first The message is used to instruct the terminal to add PSCell or change PSCell; the first message includes the configuration of the second target PSCell; the terminal stops the process of conditional PSCell addition or conditional PSCell change, and executes the process of adding PSCell or changing PSCell.
  • the terminal can stop the conditional PSCell addition or conditional PSCell change process. Perform the PSCell addition or PSCell change process.
  • the foregoing method further includes: in the case where the foregoing terminal successfully accesses the second target PSCell, the foregoing terminal deletes The configuration of at least one candidate PSCell. Based on this solution, when the terminal successfully accesses the target PSCell in the traditional PSCell addition or change process, the terminal deletes the configuration of at least one candidate PSCell in the conditional PSCell addition or change process.
  • a communication method includes: a first access network device determines a first signal quality parameter threshold, and the first signal quality parameter threshold is used by a terminal to determine the first signal quality parameter threshold.
  • the signal quality of the cell is a cell managed by the first access network device; the first access network device sends first information to the terminal, and the first information includes the first signal quality parameter threshold and
  • the trigger condition is a trigger condition for the terminal to change to the target primary and secondary cell PSCell or to add the target PSCell.
  • the first access network device sends the threshold value of the first signal quality parameter to the terminal, so that the terminal first determines the signal quality of the first cell before determining the target PSCell, and the terminal determines the first cell of its connection.
  • the signal quality of a cell is good, further determining the target PSCell can ensure the signal quality of the terminal in the dual connection mode and improve the user experience.
  • the foregoing method further includes: the foregoing first access network device separately sends a first message to a second access network device to which at least one candidate PSCell belongs, and the first message is used
  • the first message includes indication information of conditional PSCell addition or conditional PSCell change
  • the first access network device receives the second access network device from the second access network device.
  • the second message includes the configuration of the PSCell allocated by the second access network device.
  • the first access network device sends an SN addition request message to the second access network device to which the candidate PSCell belongs, but the SN addition request message includes an indication of condition addition or change.
  • the first message may also be a conditional SN addition request message.
  • the above-mentioned method further includes: the above-mentioned first access network device respectively reports to the second PSCell to which the at least one first candidate PSCell belongs.
  • the access network device sends a third message, the third message is used to instruct the second access network device to release the configuration of the first candidate PSCell, the at least one candidate PSCell includes the first candidate PSCell, and the first candidate PSCell is associated with
  • the aforementioned target PSCell is a cell managed by different access network equipment.
  • a communication method includes: a terminal receives first information from a first master node MN, the first information includes the identification of at least one candidate MN, and each candidate MN corresponds to The identity of at least one candidate secondary node SN, the primary cell group MCG configuration of the at least one candidate MN, the secondary cell group SCG configuration of the at least one candidate SN, and the trigger condition; the trigger condition is that the terminal switches to the target MN and changes to the target The trigger condition of the SN, the trigger condition includes the first signal quality parameter threshold; the terminal determines the target MN and the target SN, the signal quality parameter of the target MN and the signal quality parameter of the target SN, the result of the function is greater than or It is equal to the threshold value of the first signal quality parameter mentioned above.
  • the target MN and the target SN can be determined simultaneously through the condition combination of conditional MN switching and conditional SN change. Compared with the method of first determining the target MN by triggering conditions and then determining the target SN, this solution can determine the target MN and the target SN at the same time.
  • the trigger condition further includes: a first weight corresponding to the candidate MN, and a second weight corresponding to the candidate SN
  • the terminal determines the target MN and the target SN
  • the above-mentioned terminal determines the candidate MN and the candidate SN whose weighted sum is greater than or equal to the above-mentioned first signal quality parameter threshold value as the above-mentioned target MN and the above-mentioned target SN. Based on this solution, the target MN and the target SN can be determined at the same time through the weighted sum of the signal quality parameters of the candidate MN and the candidate SN.
  • a communication method includes: a first master node MN determines a trigger condition, and the trigger condition is a trigger condition for the terminal to switch to the target MN and change to the target secondary node SN, and the trigger
  • the condition includes the first signal quality parameter threshold; the trigger condition is used for the terminal to determine the target MN and the target SN at the same time according to the result of the function of each candidate MN and the signal quality parameter of the candidate SN corresponding to the candidate MN;
  • the above-mentioned first MN sends first information to the terminal.
  • the first information includes the identification of at least one candidate MN, the identification of at least one candidate SN corresponding to each candidate MN, the MCG configuration of the primary cell group of the at least one candidate MN, the at least The secondary cell group SCG configuration of a candidate SN, and the above trigger conditions.
  • the target MN and the target SN can be determined simultaneously through the condition combination of conditional MN switching and conditional SN change. Compared with the method of first determining the target MN by triggering conditions and then determining the target SN, this solution can determine the target MN and the target SN at the same time.
  • the above trigger condition further includes a first weight corresponding to the candidate MN and a second weight corresponding to the candidate SN. Based on this solution, the target MN and the target SN can be determined at the same time through the weighted sum of the signal quality parameters of the candidate MN and the candidate SN.
  • the foregoing method further includes: the foregoing first MN sends a first message to the first SN, and the first message is used for Instruct the first SN not to initiate a conditional SN change, and the first SN is the secondary node SN of the terminal during dual-connection communication before the terminal changes to the target SN.
  • the source MN initiates the conditional SN change with the conditional SN change to the terminal, the source SN is instructed not to initiate the conditional SN change, thereby avoiding the problem of possible collisions between different change situations.
  • a communication method includes: a terminal receives first information from a first master node MN, the first information includes an identifier of at least one candidate MN, and each candidate MN corresponds to The identity of at least one candidate primary and secondary cell PSCell, the primary cell group MCG configuration of the at least one candidate MN, the configuration of the at least one candidate PSCell, and the trigger condition; the trigger condition is the trigger for the terminal to switch to the target MN and change to the target PSCell Condition, the trigger condition includes a first signal quality parameter threshold; the terminal determines the target MN and the target PSCell, the signal quality parameter of the target MN and the signal quality parameter of the target PSCell, the result of the function is greater than or equal to the first signal quality parameter; A signal quality parameter threshold.
  • the target MN and the target PSCell can be determined simultaneously through the condition combination of conditional MN handover and conditional PSCell change.
  • this solution can simultaneously determine the target MN and the target PSCell.
  • the trigger condition further includes: a first weight corresponding to the candidate MN and a second weight corresponding to the candidate PSCell, the terminal determines the target MN and the target PSCell,
  • the method includes: the terminal determines the signal quality parameters of the candidate MN and the candidate PSCell according to the signal quality parameters of each candidate MN, the signal quality parameters of a candidate PSCell corresponding to the candidate MN, and the first weight and the second weight.
  • the above-mentioned terminal determines the candidate MN and the candidate PSCell whose weighted sum is greater than or equal to the above-mentioned first signal quality parameter threshold value as the above-mentioned target MN and the above-mentioned target PSCell. Based on this solution, the weighted sum of the signal quality parameters of the candidate MN and the candidate PSCell can be used to determine the target MN and the target PSCell at the same time.
  • a communication method includes: a first master node MN determines a trigger condition, where the trigger condition is a trigger condition for a terminal to switch to a target MN and change to a target primary and secondary cell PSCell, and The trigger condition includes the first signal quality parameter threshold; the trigger condition is used for the terminal to determine the target MN and the target PSCell at the same time according to the result of the function of each candidate MN and the signal quality parameter of the candidate PSCell corresponding to the candidate MN; The above-mentioned first MN sends first information to the terminal.
  • the first information includes the identification of at least one candidate MN, the identification of at least one candidate PSCell corresponding to each candidate MN, the MCG configuration of the primary cell group of the at least one candidate MN, the at least The configuration of a candidate PSCell and the above trigger conditions.
  • the target MN and the target PSCell can be determined simultaneously through the condition combination of conditional MN handover and conditional PSCell change.
  • this solution can simultaneously determine the target MN and the target PSCell.
  • the above trigger condition further includes a first weight corresponding to the candidate MN and a second weight corresponding to the candidate PSCell. Based on this solution, the weighted sum of the signal quality parameters of the candidate MN and the candidate PSCell can be used to determine the target MN and the target PSCell at the same time.
  • the above method further includes: the first MN sends a first message to the first SN, and the first message is After instructing the first SN not to initiate a conditional PSCell change, the first SN is the secondary node SN of the terminal during dual-connection communication before the terminal changes to the target SN.
  • the source MN initiates a conditional PSCell switch with a conditional SN change to the terminal, the source SN is instructed not to initiate a conditional PSCell change, thereby avoiding the problem of possible collisions between different change situations.
  • the above-mentioned signal quality parameters include one or more of: reference signal received power RSRP, reference signal received quality RSRQ, received signal strength indicator RSSI, and signal to interference plus noise ratio SINR.
  • the above-mentioned signal quality parameter may be one or more of RSRP, RSRQ, RSSI, and SINR. It can be understood that the signal quality parameters in the above aspects can be the same or different.
  • a computer storage medium stores computer program code.
  • the processor executes any one of the above.
  • the tenth aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a computer program product that stores computer software instructions executed by the above-mentioned processor, and the computer software instructions include a program for executing the solution described in the above-mentioned aspect.
  • An eleventh aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a communication device, which includes a processor, and may also include a transceiver and a memory.
  • the transceiver is used for sending and receiving information or communicating with other network elements;
  • the memory Used to store computer-executable instructions;
  • the processor is used to execute the computer-executed instructions to support the terminal device or network device to implement the communication method described in any of the above aspects.
  • the twelfth aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a communication device, which may exist in the form of a chip product.
  • the structure of the device includes a processor and may also include a memory for coupling with the processor, The necessary program instructions and data of the device are saved, and the processor is used to execute the program instructions stored in the memory to support the terminal device or the network device to execute the method described in any of the above aspects.
  • the thirteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a communication device that can exist in the form of a chip product.
  • the structure of the device includes a processor and an interface circuit.
  • the processor is used to communicate with other devices through a receiving circuit. , So that the device executes the communication method described in any one of the above aspects.
  • a fourteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a communication system, including a terminal and a first access network device, the terminal is configured to execute the communication method described in the first aspect, and the first access network device uses To implement the communication method described in the second aspect above.
  • a fifteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a communication system, including a terminal and a first access network device, the terminal is used to execute the communication method described in the third aspect, and the first access network device uses To implement the communication method described in the fourth aspect.
  • a seventeenth aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a communication system, including a terminal and a first master node, the terminal is configured to execute the communication method described in the fifth aspect, and the first master node is configured to execute the first master node.
  • the communication method described in the six aspects is configured to execute the communication method described in the six aspects.
  • An eighteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a communication system, including a terminal and a first master node, the terminal is configured to execute the communication method described in the seventh aspect, and the first master node is configured to execute the first The communication method described in the eight aspects.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of the architecture of a dual-connection network provided by an embodiment of the application
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of another dual-connection network architecture provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of another dual-connection network architecture provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 24 is a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 25 is a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 26 is a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 27 is a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 28 is a schematic structural diagram of another communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram of the composition of a communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram of the composition of another communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • At least one of a, b, or c can represent: a, b, c, a-b, a-c, b-c or a-b-c, where a, b, and c can be single or multiple.
  • the embodiment of this application defines the one-way communication link from the access network to the terminal as the downlink, the data transmitted on the downlink is the downlink data, and the transmission direction of the downlink data is called the downlink direction; and the one from the terminal to the access network
  • the unidirectional communication link is the uplink, the data transmitted on the uplink is the uplink data, and the transmission direction of the uplink data is called the uplink direction.
  • the resources described in the embodiments of the present application may also be referred to as transmission resources, including one or more of time domain resources, frequency domain resources, and code channel resources, and may be used to carry data in the uplink communication process or the downlink communication process. Or signaling.
  • B corresponding to A means that B is associated with A, and B can be determined according to A.
  • determining B based on A does not mean that B is determined only based on A, and B can also be determined based on A and/or other information.
  • connection appearing in the embodiments of this application refers to various connection modes such as direct connection or indirect connection to realize communication between devices, which is not limited in the embodiment of this application.
  • transmit/transmission in the embodiments of this application refers to two-way transmission, including sending and/or receiving actions.
  • the “transmission” in the embodiment of the present application includes the sending of data, the receiving of data, or the sending of data and the receiving of data.
  • the data transmission here includes uplink and/or downlink data transmission.
  • the data may include channels and/or signals, uplink data transmission means uplink channel and/or uplink signal transmission, and downlink data transmission means downlink channel and/or downlink signal transmission.
  • the terminal and/or the base station may perform some or all of the steps in the embodiments of the present application. These steps or operations are only examples. In the embodiments of the present application, other operations or various operations may also be performed. Deformation of the operation. In addition, each step may be performed in a different order presented in the embodiment of the present application, and it may not be necessary to perform all the operations in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application can be applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 1.
  • the terminal supports dual connectivity (DC), and the master node (Master Node, MN) and the secondary node (secondary node, SN) jointly provide data transmission services for the terminal.
  • the MN is connected to the Core Network (Core Network, CN) through the S1/NG interface.
  • the MN and the core network include at least a control plane connection and a user plane connection.
  • the S1 interface includes S1-U/NG-U and S1-C/NG-C. Among them, S1-U/NG-U stands for user plane connection, and S1-C/NG-C stands for control plane connection.
  • the terminal data can be offloaded to the SN by the MN at the packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer.
  • the MN can also be called a primary base station or a primary access network device, and the SN can also be called a secondary base station or a secondary access network device.
  • the communication system in this application may be a long term evolution (LTE) wireless communication system, or a fifth generation (5G) mobile communication system such as a new radio (NR) system, or other Next generation (NG) communication systems, etc., this embodiment of the application does not limit this.
  • LTE long term evolution
  • 5G fifth generation
  • NR new radio
  • NG Next generation
  • the foregoing MN and SN may be base stations defined by the LTE third generation partnership project (3rd generation partnership project, 3GPP).
  • 3rd generation partnership project 3rd generation partnership project, 3GPP
  • it can be the base station equipment in the LTE system, that is, evolved NodeB (eNB/eNodeB); it can also be the access network side equipment in the NR system, including gNB, transmission point (trasmission/reception point, TRP). )Wait.
  • the above-mentioned MN and SN may be composed of a centralized unit (CU) and a distributed unit (DU).
  • the CU-DU structure can split the protocol layer of the base station, and some The functions of the protocol layer are centrally controlled by the CU, and some or all of the functions of the protocol layer are distributed in the DU, and the DU is centrally controlled by the CU, which can save costs and facilitate network expansion.
  • the MN and SN may include one or more CUs and one or more DUs. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific architecture of the above-mentioned MN and SN.
  • dual connectivity can be implemented between access network devices of different standards, as shown in FIG. 2, which is a schematic diagram of an LTE-NR dual connectivity (E-UTRA-NR Dual Connectivity, EN-DC) network.
  • the EN-DC network is a dual connection between 4G radio access network and 5G NR, with LTE base station (LTE eNB) as MN and NR base station (NR gNB) as SN.
  • LTE eNB LTE base station
  • NR gNB NR base station
  • S1 interface between the LTE eNB and the evolved Packet Core (EPC) of the LTE system, and there is at least a control plane connection and possibly a user plane connection.
  • EPC evolved Packet Core
  • there is an S1-U interface between the NR gNB and the EPC that is, there can only be a user plane connection.
  • FIG. 3 it is a schematic diagram of an NR-LTE dual connectivity (NR-E-UTRA Dual Connectivity, NE-DC) network.
  • the NE-DC network is a dual connection between the 4G radio access network under the 5G core network and 5G NR.
  • the NR base station (gNB) is used as the MN
  • the LTE base station (ng-eNB) is used as the SN
  • both MN and SN are connected to the 5G core network ( 5th Generation Core Network, 5GC).
  • 5GC 5th Generation Core Network
  • there is an NG interface between the gNB and the 5GC which can establish a control plane connection and a user plane connection for the terminal, and the ng-eNB sends user plane data to the 5GC through the gNB.
  • there is an NG-U interface between the ng-eNB and 5GC which only establishes a user plane connection for the terminal, and the ng-eNB directly sends user plane data to the 5GC.
  • FIG. 4 it is a schematic diagram of a 5G core network LTE-NR (Next Generation E-UTRA-NR Dual Connectivity, NGEN-DC) network.
  • the NGEN-DC network is a dual connection between the 4G radio access network under the 5G core network and 5G NR.
  • the LTE base station (ng-eNB) serves as the MN
  • the NR base station (gNB) serves as the SN
  • both MN and SN are connected to the 5GC.
  • ng-eNB serves as the MN
  • gNB NR base station
  • both MN and SN are connected to the 5GC.
  • there is an NG interface between the ng-eNB and the 5GC which can establish a control plane connection and a user plane connection for the terminal, and the gNB sends user plane data to the 5GC through the ng-eNB.
  • there is an NG-U interface between the gNB and 5GC which only establishes a user plane connection for the terminal, and the gNB directly
  • the user plane connection may not be established between the SN and the core network, but data is transferred via the MN.
  • the terminal's data arrives at the MN first, and the MN is at the PDCP layer.
  • the data of the terminal is offloaded to the SN, where the offloaded data is in the form of a PDCP protocol data unit (Protocol Data Unit, PDU), for example.
  • PDU Protocol Data Unit
  • the communication method provided in the embodiments of this application can be adapted to traditional LTE dual connectivity, can also be adapted to the EN-DC network, NE-DC network, or NGEN-DC network of the 5G system, and can also be adapted to the 5G core Network NR-NR Dual Connectivity (NR-NR Dual Connectivity, NR-DC) and other DC architectures in the future, the embodiment of this application does not limit the specific architecture of the dual-connectivity network to which the communication method is adapted.
  • Figures 2 to 4 illustrate examples.
  • the EN-DC network architecture is taken as an example to describe the communication method provided in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the data radio bearer (DRB) established by the terminal and the access network side can be independently provided by the MN or the SN, or can be provided by the MN and the SN at the same time.
  • the bearer provided by the MN is called the Master Cell Group (MCG) bearer, where the MCG includes at least one MN-managed cell used to provide air interface resources for the terminal; the bearer provided by the SN is called the Secondary Cell Group (Secondary Cell Group).
  • Cell Group, SCG Cell Group
  • the bearer in which the MN and SN provide air interface resources at the same time is called a split bearer.
  • the cell When there is only one cell in the MCG, the cell is the primary cell (Primary cell, PCell) of the terminal. When there is only one cell in the SCG, the cell is the primary and secondary cell (Primary Secondary Cell, PSCell) of the terminal. PCell and PSCell can be collectively referred to as a special cell (Special Cell, SpCell). When there are multiple cells in each of the MCG or the SCG, all cells other than SpCell may be referred to as secondary cells (Secondary Cell, SCell). At this time, the SCell and SpCell in each cell group perform carrier aggregation (carrier aggregation, CA) to jointly provide transmission resources for the terminal.
  • carrier aggregation carrier aggregation
  • the PSCell belongs to the cell of the SCG, and the UE is instructed to perform random access or initial PUSCH transmission.
  • the SCell is a cell working on a secondary carrier. Once a radio resource control (Radio Resource Control, RRC) connection is established, the SCell may be configured to provide additional radio resources.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the terminal performs carrier aggregation or dual connectivity communication
  • the source MN sends to the terminal
  • the signal quality in the dual connection mode cannot be guaranteed, and the user experience is poor.
  • the signal quality of the terminal in the dual connection mode may not be guaranteed, and the user experience is poor.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which can ensure the signal quality of the terminal in the dual connection mode and improve the user experience.
  • the MN, SN, and terminal shown in FIG. 1 may all adopt the composition structure shown in FIG. 5 or include the components shown in FIG. 5.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of the composition of a communication device 500 provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • the communication device 500 may include at least one processor 501, a memory 502, a transceiver 503, and a communication bus 504.
  • the processor 501 is the control center of the communication device 500, and may be a processor or a collective name for multiple processing elements.
  • the processor 501 is a central processing unit (CPU), or a specific integrated circuit (Application Specific Integrated Circuit, ASIC), or one or more integrated circuits configured to implement the embodiments of the present invention
  • CPU central processing unit
  • ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
  • microprocessors digital signal processor, DSP
  • field programmable gate arrays Field Programmable Gate Array, FPGA
  • the processor 501 can execute various functions of the communication device by running or executing a software program stored in the memory 502 and calling data stored in the memory 502.
  • the processor 501 may include one or more CPUs, such as CPU0 and CPU1 shown in FIG. 5.
  • the communication device 500 may include multiple processors, such as the processor 501 and the processor 505 shown in FIG. 5. Each of these processors can be a single-core processor (single-CPU) or a multi-core processor (multi-CPU).
  • the processor here may refer to one or more communication devices, circuits, and/or processing cores for processing data (for example, computer program instructions).
  • the memory 502 may be a read-only memory (ROM) or other types of static storage communication devices that can store static information and instructions, a random access memory (RAM), or other types that can store information and instructions.
  • the type of dynamic storage communication equipment can also be Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (EEPROM), CD-ROM (Compact Disc Read-Only Memory, CD-ROM) or other optical disk storage, Optical disc storage (including compact disc, laser disc, optical disc, digital versatile disc, Blu-ray disc, etc.), magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage communication devices, or can be used to carry or store desired program codes in the form of instructions or data structures and Any other medium that can be accessed by the computer, but not limited to this.
  • the memory 502 may exist independently, and is connected to the processor 501 through a communication bus 504.
  • the memory 502 may also be integrated with the processor 501.
  • the memory 502 is used to store a software program for executing the solution of the present invention, and is controlled by the processor 501 to execute it.
  • the transceiver 503 is used for communication with the access point.
  • the transceiver 503 may also be used to communicate with a communication network, such as an Ethernet, a radio access network (RAN), a wireless local area network (Wireless Local Area Networks, WLAN), etc.
  • the transceiver 503 may include a receiving unit to implement a receiving function, and a sending unit to implement a sending function.
  • the communication bus 504 may be an Industry Standard Architecture (ISA) bus, an external communication device interconnection (Peripheral Component, PCI) bus, or an Extended Industry Standard Architecture (EISA) bus, etc.
  • ISA Industry Standard Architecture
  • PCI Peripheral Component
  • EISA Extended Industry Standard Architecture
  • the bus can be divided into address bus, data bus, control bus and so on. For ease of presentation, only one thick line is used to represent in FIG. 5, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
  • the communication device 500 may be a desktop computer, a portable computer, a network server, a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a wireless terminal, an embedded device, a chip system, or a device with a similar structure in FIG. 5.
  • the composition structure shown in FIG. 5 does not constitute a limitation on the communication device.
  • the communication device may include more or less components than those shown in the figure, or combine certain components. , Or different component arrangements.
  • the communication method includes steps S600-S603.
  • the first access network device determines a first signal quality parameter threshold.
  • the first signal quality parameter threshold is used by the terminal to determine the signal quality of the first cell, and the first cell is a cell managed by the first access network device.
  • the signal quality parameters include: Reference Signal Receiving Power (RSRP), Reference Signal Receiving Quality (RSRQ), Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI), and signal and interference plus One or more of the noise ratio (Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio, SINR).
  • RSRP Reference Signal Receiving Power
  • RSRQ Reference Signal Receiving Quality
  • RSSI Received Signal Strength Indicator
  • SINR Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio
  • the foregoing first signal quality parameter threshold may include a threshold corresponding to each signal quality parameter.
  • the signal quality parameter includes RSRP and RSRQ
  • the first signal quality parameter threshold may include a threshold corresponding to RSRP and a threshold corresponding to RSRQ.
  • determining the first signal quality parameter threshold by the first access network device may include: the first access network device determines the first signal quality parameter threshold by itself.
  • the determination of the first signal quality parameter threshold by the first access network device may further include: the first access network device receives the SN determination Or, the first access network device may negotiate with the SN to determine the first signal quality parameter threshold.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific implementation manner in which the first access network device determines the first signal quality parameter threshold value, and is only an exemplary description here.
  • the first access network device may determine the first signal quality parameter threshold value according to parameters such as the quality requirement of the terminal and the load condition of the first access network device.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the method for determining the threshold value of the first signal quality parameter, and it is only an exemplary description here.
  • the first access network device sends first information to the terminal.
  • the first information includes a first signal quality parameter threshold value and a trigger condition, and the trigger condition is a trigger condition for the terminal to change to the first target SN or to add the first target SN.
  • the first information may further include the SCG configuration of at least one candidate SN, and the at least one candidate SN includes the first target SN.
  • the trigger condition may include the type of execution event and the corresponding threshold value.
  • the execution event type may include A3 event, A4 event, A5 event, B1 event, B2 event, or other execution event types.
  • event A3 indicates that the quality of the neighboring cell is higher than the quality of the serving cell, and is used for coverage-based handover of the same frequency and different frequencies
  • event A4 indicates that the quality of the neighboring cell is higher than a certain threshold, and is used for load-based handover, which can be used for load Balance
  • A5 event indicates that the quality of the serving cell is lower than a certain threshold and the quality of the neighboring cell is higher than a certain threshold, which can be used for load balancing
  • different system measurement events Event B1: The quality of the neighboring cell is higher than a certain threshold and is used to measure high priority Different system cell
  • B2 event The quality of the serving cell is lower than a certain threshold, and the quality of the neighboring cell is higher than a certain threshold, which is used for measurement
  • the above-mentioned trigger condition may include one or more execution event types, and a threshold value corresponding to each execution event type.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific event types included in the trigger condition, and is only an exemplary description here.
  • the terminal may only transmit data through the first access network device before adding the first target SN.
  • carrier aggregation can be performed, that is, the terminal can simultaneously use multiple cells managed by the first access network device (one of which is the primary cell PCell and the other is the secondary cell SCell) for up and down Line communication, thereby increasing the data transmission rate.
  • the above-mentioned first cell is a PCell in which the terminal works in a single connection mode for carrier aggregation.
  • the first cell may also be a serving cell in which the terminal works in a single-connection single-cell mode.
  • the terminal may transmit data through the source SN and the first access network device before changing to the first target SN. That is, before the terminal is changed to the first target SN, it works in the dual-connection mode, and the first access network device is the master node MN of the terminal in dual-connection communication.
  • the above-mentioned first cell is a PCell managed by the MN when the terminal works in the dual connection mode.
  • the above-mentioned first information may be carried in one message or in multiple messages.
  • the first information may be carried in an RRC reconfiguration message (for example, RRC Connection Reconfiguration or RRC Reconfiguration).
  • the trigger condition in the first information may be carried in the RRC reconfiguration message, and the threshold value of the first signal quality parameter in the first information may be carried in the system message.
  • the SCG configuration of the at least one candidate SN may also be carried in the RRC reconfiguration message.
  • one or more of the first signal quality parameter threshold, trigger condition, and at least one candidate SN included in the above first information may be determined by the MN, or may be determined by the SN, or may be It is decided by the MN and SN through negotiation, which is not limited in the embodiment of this application.
  • the terminal receives the first information.
  • the terminal when the first information is carried in the RRC reconfiguration message, the terminal receives the RRC reconfiguration message and obtains the first information.
  • the terminal receives the RRC reconfiguration message and obtains the trigger condition, and the terminal receives the system message and obtains the first signal quality parameter threshold.
  • the terminal Based on the first information, the terminal determines the candidate SN that meets the trigger condition as the first target SN in the case that the signal quality parameter of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first signal quality parameter threshold.
  • the first cell is a cell managed by the first access network device.
  • the first signal quality parameter threshold may be multiple, and the signal quality parameter of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first signal quality parameter threshold may include : At least one signal quality parameter of the first cell is greater than or equal to the threshold value corresponding to each signal quality parameter.
  • the signal quality parameters include RSRP and RSRQ
  • the first signal quality parameter threshold value may include a threshold value corresponding to RSRP (denoted as threshold value 1) and a threshold value corresponding to RSRQ (denoted as threshold value).
  • the above-mentioned signal quality parameter of the first cell being greater than or equal to the first signal quality parameter threshold may include: the RSRP of the first cell is greater than or equal to the threshold 1, and/or the RSRQ of the first cell is greater than or equal to Threshold value 2.
  • the terminal may determine the signal quality of the first cell to which it is connected based on the first signal quality parameter threshold value in the first information, and the signal quality parameter of the first cell In the case that it is greater than or equal to the first signal quality parameter threshold, the terminal determines that the signal quality of the first cell is good. Furthermore, the candidate SN that meets the triggering condition among the at least one candidate SN is determined as the first target SN.
  • the terminal when the first cell is a serving cell in which the terminal works in single-connection single-cell mode, or the terminal works in a primary cell that performs carrier aggregation in single-connection mode, the terminal first determines the signal of the first cell In the quality situation, when the signal quality parameter of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first signal quality parameter threshold, the terminal further determines the candidate SN that meets the trigger condition as the first target SN.
  • the terminal may initiate random access to the first target SN determined by the terminal, and when the terminal successfully accesses the first target SN, the terminal works in the dual connection mode.
  • the first access network device is the MN when the terminal is working in the dual connection mode, and the first target SN is the SN when the terminal is working in the dual connection mode.
  • the terminal may first determine the signal quality of the first cell, and the signal quality parameters of the first cell In the case that it is greater than or equal to the first signal quality parameter threshold, the terminal further determines the candidate SN that meets the trigger condition as the first target SN.
  • the terminal may initiate random access to the first target SN determined by the terminal, and when the terminal successfully accesses the first target SN, the terminal may simultaneously transmit data through the first access network device and the first target SN.
  • the first access network device is the MN when the terminal is working in the dual connection mode
  • the first target SN is the SN when the terminal is working in the dual connection mode.
  • the first access network device sends the threshold value of the first signal quality parameter to the terminal, so that the terminal first determines the signal quality of the first cell before determining the target SN, and then determines the first cell connected to the terminal before determining the target SN.
  • the signal quality of a cell is good, further determining the target SN can ensure the signal quality of the terminal in the dual connection mode and improve the user experience.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method that sends first information to a terminal through a first access network device; the terminal receives the first information; based on the first information, the terminal has a signal quality parameter in the first cell greater than or equal to the first signal
  • the candidate SN that meets the trigger condition is determined as the first target SN.
  • the terminal first determines the signal quality of the first cell before determining the target SN, and when the signal quality of the first cell is good, further determines the target SN, so that the terminal changes or adds the first SN before changing or adding the SN.
  • the signal quality of the cell can be guaranteed, thereby ensuring the signal quality of the terminal in the dual-connection mode and improving the user experience.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a communication method. As shown in FIG. 7, in the case that the terminal and the above-mentioned first target SN are successfully connected, after the above-mentioned steps S600-S603, step S604 may be further included.
  • the first access network device sends a first message to the first candidate SN, where the first message is used to instruct the first candidate SN to release the SCG configuration of the first candidate SN.
  • the first candidate SN is an SN other than the first target SN among at least one candidate SN.
  • At least one candidate SN includes T-SN1, T-SN2, and T-SN3. If the first target SN determined in step S603 is T-SN1, then in the case that the terminal and the T-SN1 are successfully connected, the first access network device sends other candidate SNs (T-SN2 and T-SN3) The first message is sent to instruct T-SN2 to release the SCG configuration of T-SN2, and T-SN3 to release the SCG configuration of T-SN3.
  • the foregoing first message may be a release request message.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a communication method. As shown in FIG. 8, when the terminal determines that the signal quality parameter of the first cell is less than the first signal quality parameter threshold, the method may further include after the above steps S600-S602 Step S605.
  • the terminal performs one or more of the following: the terminal determines the judgment of adding or changing the stop condition SN; or, the terminal ignores at least one The SCG configuration of the candidate SN; or, the terminal ignores the trigger condition; or, the terminal deletes the SCG configuration of at least one candidate SN; or, the terminal deletes the trigger condition.
  • the judgment of adding or changing the terminal stop condition SN includes: the terminal stops judging whether at least one candidate SN satisfies the trigger condition.
  • stopping the terminal to determine whether at least one candidate SN meets the above trigger condition may include: after the terminal stops for a preset period of time, determining the signal quality of the first cell, if the signal quality parameter of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first signal quality Parameter threshold value, continue to determine whether at least one candidate SN meets the above trigger condition; if the signal quality parameter of the first cell is less than the first signal quality parameter threshold value, the terminal stops the preset duration again.
  • the terminal stops judging whether at least one candidate SN meets the above trigger condition, and continues to detect the signal quality of the first cell. In the case that the signal quality parameter of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first signal quality parameter threshold, the terminal continues Determine whether at least one candidate SN satisfies the above trigger condition.
  • the terminal when the signal quality parameter of the first cell is less than the first signal quality parameter threshold, the terminal ignores or deletes the SCG configuration of at least one candidate SN.
  • the terminal ignoring the SCG configuration of at least one candidate SN includes that the terminal maintains the current configuration, that is, the terminal does not perform the conditional SN addition or change process.
  • the terminal ignores or deletes the trigger condition.
  • the terminal when the signal quality of the first cell is poor, performs one or more of the following: the terminal determines the judgment of adding or changing the stop condition SN; or, the terminal ignores or deletes the SCG configuration of at least one candidate SN ; Or, the terminal ignores or deletes the trigger condition.
  • the terminal determines the judgment of adding or changing the stop condition SN; or, the terminal ignores or deletes the SCG configuration of at least one candidate SN ; Or, the terminal ignores or deletes the trigger condition.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a communication method. As shown in FIG. 9, when the terminal determines that the signal quality parameter of the first cell is less than the first signal quality parameter threshold, the method may further include after the above steps S600-S602 Step S606.
  • the terminal determines the candidate SN that meets the trigger condition as the target MN, and the terminal releases the first access network device; or, the terminal The candidate SN that meets the trigger condition is determined as the target MN, and the terminal switches the first access network device to the first target SN.
  • the terminal may determine a candidate SN with better signal quality that meets the trigger condition as the first target MN, and Release the MN (first access network device) with poor signal quality. This ensures that the signal quality of the MN connected to the terminal is better.
  • the terminal transmits data through the MN and the source SN at the same time.
  • the terminal may change The candidate T-SN1 with better signal quality of the trigger condition is determined as the target MN, and the MN is released. That is, the terminal can simultaneously transmit data through the target MN and the source SN.
  • the terminal in the case that the signal quality parameter of the first cell is less than the first signal quality parameter threshold, the terminal can determine the candidate SN with better signal quality that meets the trigger condition as the target MN, and determine the signal quality The poor MN (first access network device) is switched to the first target SN.
  • the terminal transmits data through the MN and the source SN at the same time.
  • the terminal may change The candidate T-SN1 with good signal quality of the trigger condition is determined as the target MN, and the MN is switched to the first target SN. That is, the terminal can simultaneously transmit data through the target MN and the first target SN.
  • a candidate SN with better signal quality can be determined as the target MN, so as to ensure that the signal quality of the target MN connected to the terminal is good, so as to improve data efficiency. Transmission efficiency improves user experience.
  • steps S607-S610 may be further included before step S600.
  • the first access network device respectively sends a second message to at least one candidate SN, where the second message is used to request the candidate SN to allocate wireless resources for the terminal.
  • the second message includes indication information of conditional SN addition or conditional SN change.
  • the second message may be a conditional SN addition request message (Conditional SN Addition Request) or an SN addition request message (SN Addition Request).
  • the SN addition request message carries indication information of SN addition or SN change.
  • At least one candidate SN includes T-SN1, T-SN2, and T-SN3.
  • the first access network device may send a second message to T-SN1, T-SN2, and T-SN3, respectively, requesting T-SN1, T-SN2, and T-SN3 to allocate wireless resources for the terminal.
  • the first access network device may send a second message to the candidate SN, and the second message carries a first list, and the first list includes multiple The identity of the candidate cell, the second message is used to instruct the candidate SN to allocate radio resources corresponding to each candidate cell for the terminal; or, in the case of managing multiple candidate cells under the candidate SN, the first access network device may The candidate SN sends multiple second messages respectively, and each second message is used to instruct the candidate SN to allocate a radio resource corresponding to a candidate cell to the terminal.
  • the candidate SN may receive a conditional SN addition request message or an SN addition request message.
  • the candidate SN sends a third message to the first access network device, where the third message includes the SCG configuration allocated by the candidate SN.
  • the third message may be a Conditional SN Addition Request Acknowledge message (Conditional SN Addition Request Acknowledge) or an SN Addition Request Acknowledge message (SN Addition Request Acknowledge).
  • the SN addition request confirmation message carries the indication information of SN addition or SN change.
  • At least one candidate SN includes T-SN1, T-SN2, and T-SN3.
  • T-SN1, T-SN2, and T-SN3 can accept the resource request sent by the first access network device, T-SN1 can send a third message to the first access network device, and the third message includes the T-SN1 allocation
  • T-SN2 can send a third message to the first access network device, the third message includes the SCG configuration allocated by T-SN2; T-SN3 can send a third message to the first access network device, the The third message includes the SCG configuration allocated by T-SN3.
  • the SCG configuration allocated by the candidate SN can be configured in full or incrementally.
  • the foregoing third message may also include an indication of full RRC configuration (full RRC configuration) or delta RRC configuration (delta RRC configuration).
  • the third message includes an indication of the incremental RRC configuration, before the above step S607, the first access network device may request the current SCG configuration from the source SN.
  • the first access network device receives the third message.
  • the first access network device may receive a conditional SN addition request confirmation message or an SN addition request confirmation message sent by the candidate SN.
  • the first access network device may send an SN addition request message to at least one candidate SN, which is used to request the candidate SN to allocate SCG resources to the terminal, and when the candidate SN receives the resource request sent by the first access network device
  • the candidate SN sends an SN addition request confirmation message carrying the SCG configuration to the first access network device, so that the first access network device can send RRC reconfiguration information to the terminal to instruct the terminal to change or add the SN.
  • steps S611-S614 may be included after the above step S601.
  • the first access network device sends a fourth message to the terminal, where the fourth message is used to instruct the terminal to add or change the SN.
  • the fourth message includes the SCG configuration of the second target SN.
  • the fourth message may be an RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the fourth message sent by the first access network device to the terminal instructs the terminal to change the SN or add the SN.
  • step S611 instructs the terminal to perform traditional SN addition or change without conditional judgment, that is, instructs the terminal to add or change to the second target SN.
  • the terminal is instructed to perform the SN condition or change with conditional judgment, that is, it is necessary to determine the candidate SN that meets the trigger condition among at least one candidate SN as the first target SN, and then add or change to the first target SN.
  • SN That is, after the first access network device initiates the conditional SN addition or change process (step S601), it initiates the traditional SN addition or change process (step S611).
  • the terminal receives the fourth message.
  • the terminal stops the process of conditional SN addition or conditional SN change, and executes the process of SN addition or SN change.
  • conditional SN addition or conditional SN change may include: the terminal compares the signal quality parameter of the first cell with the first signal quality parameter threshold value, or the terminal determines whether the candidate SN meets the trigger condition.
  • the terminal when the terminal receives the fourth message from the first access network device, if the terminal is comparing the signal quality parameter of the first cell with the first signal quality parameter threshold, the terminal will stop comparing the signal of the first cell The size of the quality parameter and the threshold value of the first signal quality parameter is added to the second target SN or changed to the second target SN.
  • the terminal when the terminal receives the fourth message from the first access network device, if the terminal is determining whether the candidate SN meets the trigger condition, the terminal will stop determining whether the candidate SN meets the trigger condition, and add a second target SN or change to the second target SN. 2.
  • Target SN when the terminal receives the fourth message from the first access network device, if the terminal is determining whether the candidate SN meets the trigger condition, the terminal will stop determining whether the candidate SN meets the trigger condition, and add a second target SN or change to the second target SN.
  • the terminal can stop the conditional SN addition or conditional SN change process.
  • Perform the SN addition or SN change process That is, the priority of adding or changing the traditional SN is higher than the priority of adding or changing the conditional SN.
  • the terminal In the process of the terminal performing the conditional SN addition or conditional SN change process, if it receives the instruction of the traditional SN addition or SN change, the terminal will stop the conditional SN addition or conditional SN change process, and execute the SN addition or SN Change process.
  • the terminal may continue to perform the conditional SN addition or conditional SN change process.
  • the terminal may delete the SCG configuration assigned to the terminal by at least one candidate SN in the conditional SN addition or change process.
  • the terminal may also add the condition SN or delete the trigger condition in the change process.
  • the terminal can stop the conditional SN addition or conditional SN change process, and execute SN addition or SN change process.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a communication method. As shown in FIG. 12, it is applied in the process of adding a conditional SN.
  • the method may include steps S1201-S1213.
  • the first access network device sends an SN addition request message to the candidate SN.
  • the SN addition request message carries an indication of condition addition.
  • the candidate SN may be one or more, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the first access network device sends SN addition request messages to multiple candidate SNs respectively, instructing the candidate SNs to allocate wireless resources for the terminal.
  • the first access network device may also send a conditional SN addition request message (Conditional SN Addition Request) to the candidate SN.
  • a conditional SN addition request message Conditional SN Addition Request
  • the candidate SN in FIG. 12 includes a first target SN and a first candidate SN.
  • the candidate SN receives an SN addition request message.
  • the candidate SN sends an SN addition request confirmation message to the first access network device.
  • the SN addition request confirmation message carries an indication of condition addition.
  • the candidate SN when the candidate SN accepts the resource request sent by the first access network device, the candidate SN sends an SN addition request confirmation message to the first access network device, and the SN addition request confirmation message carries the candidate SN as SCG configuration assigned by the terminal.
  • the candidate SN in the foregoing step S1203 may also send a Conditional SN Addition Request Acknowledge message to the first access network device.
  • the first access network device receives the SN addition request confirmation message.
  • steps S1201-S1204 may be the same as steps S607-S610, and will not be repeated here.
  • the first access network device sends first information to the terminal, where the first information includes a first signal quality parameter threshold and a trigger condition, where the trigger condition is a trigger condition for the terminal to add the first target SN.
  • the terminal receives the first information.
  • the signal quality parameter of the first cell and the threshold value of the first signal quality parameter may be divided into two situations.
  • the terminal may perform steps S1207-S1211; in the case that the signal quality parameter of the first cell is less than the first signal quality parameter threshold Next, the terminal executes step S1212 or step S1213.
  • the terminal performs steps S1207-S1211, which is the case 1 in Figure 12; the signal quality of the first cell
  • step S1212 which is the second case in FIG. 12
  • the terminal executes the step S1213 is the third situation in FIG. 12.
  • Case 1, Case 2, and Case 3 above are three parallel cases.
  • the terminal Based on the first information, the terminal determines the candidate SN that meets the trigger condition as the first target SN in the case that the signal quality parameter of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first signal quality parameter threshold.
  • steps S1205-S1207 can be the same as steps S601-S603, and will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal sends an RRC reconfiguration complete message to the first access network device.
  • the terminal applies the SCG configuration of the first target SN, and sends an RRC reconfiguration complete message to the first access network device, where the RRC reconfiguration complete message carries an indication that the first target SN is successfully added.
  • the first access network device sends an SN reconfiguration complete message to the first target SN.
  • the SN reconfiguration complete message carries an indication of conditional reconfiguration.
  • the first access network device may also send a conditional SN reconfiguration complete message to the first target SN to inform the first target SN that the terminal has completed the conditional SN addition process.
  • the terminal initiates random access to the first target SN.
  • FIG. 12 only uses the first execution of S1208 and then the execution of S1210 as an example for illustration.
  • the first access network device sends a first message to the first candidate SN.
  • the first message is used to instruct the first candidate SN to release the first candidate SN. SCG configuration.
  • step S1211 may be the same as that of step S604, and will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal performs one or more of the following: the terminal determines the judgment of adding or changing the stop condition SN; or, the terminal ignores or deletes SCG configuration of at least one candidate SN; or, the terminal ignores or deletes the trigger condition.
  • the terminal determines the candidate SN that meets the trigger condition as the target MN, and the terminal releases the first access network device; or, the terminal The candidate SN that meets the trigger condition is determined as the target MN, and the terminal switches the first access network device to the first target SN.
  • steps S1212-S1213 can be the same as steps S605-S606, and will not be repeated here.
  • the first access network device sends the first signal quality parameter threshold value to the terminal, so that the terminal first determines the signal quality of the first cell to which it is connected before determining the target SN If the signal quality of the first cell is good, the target SN is further determined, so that the signal quality of the first cell can be guaranteed before the terminal adds the SN, thereby ensuring the signal quality of the terminal in the dual connection mode and improving the user Experience.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a communication method. As shown in FIG. 13, it is applied in the process of changing the conditional SN initiated by the MN.
  • the method may include steps S1301-S1317.
  • the MN sends an SN addition request message to the candidate SN.
  • the MN is the first access network device in step S601.
  • the SN addition request message carries a condition change indication or condition indication.
  • the above-mentioned candidate SN may be one or more, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the MN sends SN addition request messages to the multiple candidate SNs respectively, instructing the candidate SNs to allocate wireless resources for the terminal.
  • the MN may also send a Conditional SN Addition Request message (Conditional SN Addition Request) to the candidate SN.
  • a Conditional SN Addition Request message Conditional SN Addition Request
  • the candidate SN in FIG. 13 includes a first target SN and a first candidate SN.
  • the candidate SN receives an SN addition request message.
  • the candidate SN sends an SN addition request confirmation message to the MN.
  • the SN addition request confirmation message carries a condition change indication or condition indication.
  • the candidate SN when the candidate SN accepts the resource request sent by the MN, the candidate SN sends an SN addition request confirmation message to the MN, and the SN addition request confirmation message carries the SCG configuration allocated by the candidate SN to the terminal.
  • the candidate SN in the above step S1303 may also send a Conditional SN Addition Request Acknowledge message to the MN.
  • the MN receives the SN addition request confirmation message.
  • steps S1301-S1304 can be the same as steps S607-S610, and will not be repeated here.
  • the MN sends an SN release request message to the source SN.
  • the SN release request message is used to instruct the source SN to release its resources.
  • the source SN receives the SN release request message.
  • the source SN after the source SN receives the SN release request message, it no longer sends data to the terminal.
  • S1307 The source SN sends an SN release request confirmation message to the MN.
  • the MN sends first information to the terminal, where the first information includes a first signal quality parameter threshold and a trigger condition, where the trigger condition is a trigger condition for the terminal to change to the first target SN.
  • the terminal receives the first information.
  • the signal quality parameter of the first cell and the threshold value of the first signal quality parameter may be divided into two situations.
  • the terminal may perform steps S1311-S1315; in the case that the signal quality parameter of the first cell is less than the first signal quality parameter threshold
  • the terminal executes step S1316 or S1317.
  • the terminal performs steps S1311-S1315 as the first situation in FIG.
  • step S1316 which is the second case in FIG. 13; when the signal quality parameter of the first cell is less than the first signal quality parameter threshold, the terminal executes the step S1317 is the third situation in FIG. 13. Case 1, Case 2, and Case 3 above are three parallel cases.
  • the terminal determines, based on the first information, a candidate SN that meets the trigger condition as the first target SN when the signal quality parameter of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first signal quality parameter threshold.
  • steps S1309-S1311 can be the same as steps S601-S603, and will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal sends an RRC reconfiguration complete message to the MN.
  • the terminal applies the SCG configuration of the first target SN, and sends an RRC reconfiguration complete message to the MN, where the RRC reconfiguration complete message carries an indication that the first target SN is successfully changed.
  • the MN sends an SN reconfiguration complete message to the first target SN.
  • the SN reconfiguration complete message carries an indication of conditional reconfiguration.
  • the MN may also send a conditional SN reconfiguration complete message to the first target SN to inform the first target SN that the terminal has completed the change process of the conditional SN.
  • the terminal initiates random access to the first target SN.
  • FIG. 13 only uses the first execution of S1312 and then the execution of S1314 as an example for illustration.
  • the MN sends a first message to the first candidate SN, where the first message is used to instruct the first candidate SN to release the SCG configuration of the first candidate SN.
  • step S1315 may be the same as that of step S604, and will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal performs one or more of the following: the terminal determines the judgment of adding or changing the stop condition SN; or, the terminal ignores or deletes SCG configuration of at least one candidate SN; or, the terminal ignores or deletes the trigger condition.
  • the terminal determines the candidate SN that meets the trigger condition as the target MN, and the terminal releases the MN; or the terminal meets the trigger condition
  • the candidate SN is determined to be the target MN, and the terminal switches the MN to the first target SN.
  • steps S1316-S1317 can be the same as steps S605-S606, and will not be repeated here.
  • the MN sends the first signal quality parameter threshold to the terminal, so that the terminal first determines the signal quality of the first cell to which it is connected before determining the target SN. And when the signal quality of the first cell is good, the target SN is further determined, so that the signal quality of the first cell can be guaranteed before the terminal changes to the target SN, thereby ensuring the signal quality of the terminal in the dual connection mode and improving the user Experience.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a communication method. As shown in FIG. 14, it is applied in the process of changing the conditional SN initiated by the SN.
  • the method may include steps S1401-S1417.
  • the source SN sends an SN change request message to the MN, where the SN change request message is used to indicate the condition SN change.
  • the SN Change request message (SN Change required) includes the identifier of at least one candidate SN and its corresponding SCG configuration.
  • the SN change request message may also include the measurement result of the candidate SN, and the measurement result is used to assist the MN in determining whether to receive the change request of the conditional SN.
  • the SN change request message may add a condition change indication or a condition indication.
  • the source SN may also send a Conditional SN Change request message (Conditional SN Change required) to the MN.
  • a Conditional SN Change request message (Conditional SN Change required)
  • the MN receives an SN change request message.
  • the MN sends an SN addition request message to the candidate SN.
  • the MN is the first access network device in step S601.
  • the SN addition request message carries a condition change indication or condition indication.
  • the above-mentioned candidate SN may be one or more, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the MN sends SN addition request messages to the multiple candidate SNs respectively, instructing the candidate SNs to allocate wireless resources for the terminal.
  • the MN may also send a Conditional SN Addition Request message (Conditional SN Addition Request) to the candidate SN.
  • a Conditional SN Addition Request message Conditional SN Addition Request
  • the candidate SN in FIG. 14 includes a first target SN and a first candidate SN.
  • the candidate SN receives the SN addition request message.
  • the candidate SN sends an SN addition request confirmation message to the MN.
  • the SN addition request confirmation message carries a condition change indication or condition indication.
  • the candidate SN when the candidate SN accepts the resource request sent by the MN, the candidate SN sends an SN addition request confirmation message to the MN, and the SN addition request confirmation message carries the SCG configuration allocated by the candidate SN to the terminal.
  • the candidate SN in the foregoing step S1405 may also send a Conditional SN Addition Request Acknowledge to the MN.
  • steps S1403-S1406 can be the same as steps S607-S610, and will not be repeated here.
  • the MN sends first information to the terminal, where the first information includes the first signal quality parameter threshold and a trigger condition, where the trigger condition is a trigger condition for the terminal to change to the first target SN.
  • the terminal receives the first information.
  • the signal quality parameter of the first cell and the threshold value of the first signal quality parameter may be divided into two situations.
  • the terminal may perform steps S1409-S1415; in the case where the signal quality parameter of the first cell is less than the first signal quality parameter threshold
  • the terminal executes step S1416 or S1417.
  • steps S1409-S1415 which is the case 1 in FIG.
  • step S1416 which is the second case in FIG. 14; when the signal quality parameter of the first cell is less than the first signal quality parameter threshold, the terminal executes the step S1417 is the third situation in FIG. 14. Case 1, Case 2, and Case 3 above are three parallel cases.
  • the terminal Based on the first information, the terminal determines the candidate SN that meets the trigger condition as the first target SN in the case that the signal quality parameter of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first signal quality parameter threshold.
  • steps S1407-S1409 can be the same as steps S601-S603, and will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal sends an RRC reconfiguration complete message to the MN.
  • the terminal applies the SCG configuration of the first target SN, and sends an RRC reconfiguration complete message to the MN, where the RRC reconfiguration complete message carries an indication that the first target SN is successfully changed.
  • the MN sends an SN change confirmation message to the source SN.
  • the SN change confirmation message is used to confirm the release of the source SN.
  • the SN change confirmation message carries a change instruction.
  • the MN may also send a conditional SN change confirmation message to the source SN.
  • the source SN receives the SN change confirmation message.
  • the source SN After the source SN receives the SN change confirmation message, it will release the resources previously allocated to the terminal and stop sending data to the terminal.
  • the MN sends an SN reconfiguration complete message to the first target SN.
  • the SN reconfiguration complete message carries an indication of conditional reconfiguration.
  • the MN may also send a conditional SN reconfiguration complete message to the first target SN to inform the first target SN that the terminal has completed the conditional SN change process.
  • the terminal initiates random access to the first target SN.
  • FIG. 14 only uses the first execution of S1410 and then the execution of S1414 as an example for illustration.
  • the MN sends a first message to the first candidate SN, where the first message is used to instruct the first candidate SN to release the SCG configuration of the first candidate SN.
  • step S1415 may be the same as that of step S604, and will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal performs one or more of the following: the terminal determines the judgment of adding or changing the stop condition SN; or, the terminal ignores or deletes SCG configuration of at least one candidate SN; or, the terminal ignores or deletes the trigger condition.
  • the terminal determines the candidate SN that meets the trigger condition as the target MN, and the terminal releases the MN; or the terminal meets the trigger condition
  • the candidate SN is determined to be the target MN, and the terminal switches the MN to the first target SN.
  • steps S1416-S1417 can be the same as steps S605-S606, and will not be repeated here.
  • the embodiment of the present application sends the first signal quality parameter threshold value to the terminal through the MN, so that the terminal first determines the signal quality of the first cell to which it is connected before determining the target SN. And when the signal quality of the first cell is good, the target SN is further determined, so that the signal quality of the first cell can be guaranteed before the terminal changes to the target SN, thereby ensuring the signal quality of the terminal in the dual connection mode and improving the user Experience.
  • a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application, as shown in FIG. 15, is the communication method including steps S1500-S1503.
  • the first access network device determines a first signal quality parameter threshold.
  • the first signal quality parameter threshold is used by the terminal to determine the signal quality of the first cell.
  • the related description about the first signal quality parameter threshold may be the same as that of step S600, and will not be repeated here.
  • the first access network device sends second information to the terminal.
  • the second information includes a first signal quality parameter threshold value and a trigger condition, and the trigger condition is a trigger condition for the terminal to change to the first target PSCell or to add the first target PSCell.
  • the terminal may only transmit data through the first access network device before adding the first target PSCell.
  • carrier aggregation can be performed, that is, the terminal can simultaneously use multiple cells managed by the first access network device (one of which is the primary cell PCell and the other is the secondary cell SCell) for up and down Line communication, thereby increasing the data transmission rate.
  • the above-mentioned first cell is a PCell in which the terminal works in a single connection mode for carrier aggregation.
  • the first cell may also be a serving cell in which the terminal works in a single-connection single-cell mode.
  • the terminal may transmit data through the PSCell managed by the source SN and the PCell managed by the first access network device before changing to the first target PSCell . That is, before the terminal is changed to the first target PSCell, it works in the dual-connection mode, and the first access network device is the master node MN of the terminal in dual-connection communication.
  • the above-mentioned first cell is a PCell managed by the MN when the terminal works in the dual connection mode.
  • the foregoing second information may further include the configuration of at least one candidate PSCell, and the at least one candidate PSCell includes the first target PSCell.
  • the at least one candidate PSCell may be a cell managed by one access network device, or may be a cell managed by different access network devices.
  • the second access network device to which the candidate PSCell belongs is the SN of the terminal during dual connectivity communication before the terminal changes to the first target PSCell. Then, when the terminal changes to the first target PSCell, the access network equipment to which the terminal belongs has not changed, but the PSCell to which the terminal is connected has changed.
  • the terminal changes to the first target PSCell it may be an intra-SN PSCell Change, that is, the secondary cell that the terminal connected to before the change to the first target PSCell belongs to the same access as the first target PSCell. Community managed by network equipment.
  • the terminal when the terminal changes to the first target PSCell, it may also be an inter-SN PSCell Change. That is, the secondary cell that the terminal is connected to before the terminal changes to the first target PSCell is in a different connection with the first target PSCell.
  • the community managed by the networked device The embodiment of the present application does not limit whether the terminal is changed to the first target PSCell, whether it is an intra-station handover or an inter-station handover.
  • the above-mentioned second information may be carried in one message or in multiple messages.
  • the second information may be carried in an RRC reconfiguration message (for example, RRC Connection Reconfiguration or RRC Reconfiguration).
  • the trigger condition in the second information may be carried in the RRC reconfiguration message, and the threshold value of the first signal quality parameter in the second information may be carried in the system message.
  • the second information further includes the configuration of at least one candidate PSCell
  • the configuration of the at least one candidate PSCell may also be carried in the RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific carrying method of the second information, and is only an exemplary description here.
  • the threshold value and trigger condition of the first signal quality parameter included in the above second information may be determined by the MN, or determined by the SN, or determined by the MN and the SN through negotiation. This is not limited.
  • the aforementioned candidate PSCell may be determined by the second access network device that manages the candidate PSCell.
  • the terminal receives the second information.
  • the terminal when the second information is carried in the RRC reconfiguration message, the terminal receives the RRC reconfiguration message and obtains the second information.
  • the terminal receives the RRC reconfiguration message and obtains the trigger condition, and the terminal receives the system message and obtains the first signal quality parameter threshold.
  • the terminal Based on the second information, the terminal determines a candidate PSCell that meets the trigger condition as the first target PSCell when the signal quality parameter of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first signal quality parameter threshold.
  • the first cell is a cell managed by the first access network device.
  • step S603 the specific implementation manner of the above-mentioned signal quality parameter of the first cell being greater than or equal to the first signal quality parameter threshold is the same as step S603.
  • step S603 the specific implementation manner of the above-mentioned signal quality parameter of the first cell being greater than or equal to the first signal quality parameter threshold is the same as step S603.
  • the terminal may determine the signal quality of the first cell to which it is connected based on the first signal quality parameter threshold value in the second information, and the signal quality parameter in the first cell is greater than If it is equal to the threshold value of the first signal quality parameter, the terminal determines that the signal quality of the first cell is good. Furthermore, the candidate PSCell that meets the trigger condition among the at least one candidate PSCell is determined as the first target PSCell. Therefore, when there is a time difference between the time when the first access network device issues the trigger condition and the time when the terminal determines the target PSCell that meets the trigger condition, the problem that the dual connection experience of the terminal is degraded due to excessive degradation of the signal quality of the first cell is avoided.
  • the terminal when the first cell is a serving cell in which the terminal works in single-connection single-cell mode, or the terminal works in a primary cell that performs carrier aggregation in single-connection mode, the terminal first determines the signal of the first cell In the quality situation, when the signal quality parameter of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first signal quality parameter threshold, the terminal further determines a candidate PSCell that meets the trigger condition as the first target PSCell.
  • the terminal may initiate random access to the second access network device to which the first target PSCell belongs, and when the terminal successfully accesses the second access network device, the terminal works in the dual connectivity mode.
  • the first access network device is the MN when the terminal is working in the dual connection mode
  • the second access network device is the SN when the terminal is working in the dual connection mode.
  • the terminal when the first cell is the primary cell managed by the MN under the dual connectivity mode of the terminal, the terminal first judges the signal quality of the first cell, and the signal quality parameter of the first cell is greater than or When it is equal to the first signal quality parameter threshold, the terminal further determines a candidate PSCell that meets the trigger condition as the first target PSCell.
  • the terminal can initiate random access to the second access network device to which the first target PSCell belongs.
  • the terminal and the second access network device are successfully connected, the terminal can simultaneously pass through the first access network device.
  • the network device and the second access network device transmit data, where the first access network device is the MN when the terminal works in the dual connection mode, and the second access network device is the SN when the terminal works in the dual connection mode.
  • the foregoing second access network device may be the secondary node SN of the terminal during dual-connection communication before the terminal changes to the first target PSCell.
  • the PSCell when the terminal changes to the first target PSCell, the PSCell is switched within the station.
  • the above-mentioned second access network device may also be a candidate SN, and the candidate SN is different from the SN of the terminal during dual-connection communication before the terminal changes to the first target PSCell.
  • the PSCell is handed over between stations.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit whether the terminal is changed to the first target PSCell, whether it is an intra-station handover or an inter-station handover.
  • the first access network device sends the threshold value of the first signal quality parameter to the terminal, so that the terminal first determines the signal quality of the first cell before determining the target PSCell, and the terminal determines the first cell connected to it.
  • the signal quality of a cell is good, further determining the target PSCell can ensure the signal quality of the terminal in the dual connection mode and improve the user experience.
  • the embodiment of the application provides a communication method that sends second information to a terminal through a first access network device; the terminal receives the second information; based on the second information, the terminal has a signal quality parameter in the first cell greater than or equal to the first signal
  • the candidate PSCell that meets the trigger condition is determined as the first target PSCell.
  • the terminal first determines the signal quality of the first cell before determining the target PSCell, and when the signal quality of the first cell is good, further determines the target PSCell, so that the terminal is the first before changing or adding PSCells.
  • the signal quality of the cell can be guaranteed, thereby ensuring the signal quality of the terminal in the dual-connection mode and improving the user experience.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a communication method. As shown in FIG. 16, in a case where the terminal and the first target PSCell are successfully connected, after the above steps S1500-S1503, step S1504 may be further included.
  • the first access network device sends a fifth message to the second access network device to which the first candidate PSCell belongs, and the fifth message is used to instruct the second access network device to which the first candidate PSCell belongs to release the first candidate. PSCell configuration.
  • the aforementioned at least one candidate PSCell includes a first candidate PSCell, and the first candidate PSCell and the first target PSCell are cells managed by different access network devices. That is, the at least one candidate PSCell may be a cell managed by multiple second access network devices, and the second access network device that manages the first target PSCell is different from the second access network device that manages the first candidate PSCell. Access network equipment.
  • the first access network device sends the first candidate PSCell (T-PSCell3
  • the second access network device base station 2 and base station 3) to which the T-PSCell 4 belongs sends a fifth message, instructing the base station 2 to release the configuration of the T-PSCell 3 and the base station 3 to release the configuration of the T-PSCell 4.
  • the foregoing fifth message may be a release request message.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a communication method. As shown in FIG. 17, when the terminal determines that the signal quality parameter of the first cell is less than the first signal quality parameter threshold, the method may further include after the above steps S1500-S1502 Step S1505.
  • the terminal performs one or more of the following: the terminal determines the judgment of stopping the addition or change of PSCell; or, the terminal ignores at least one The configuration of the candidate PSCell; or, the terminal ignores the trigger condition; or, the terminal deletes the configuration of at least one candidate PSCell; or, the terminal deletes the trigger condition.
  • the judgment of adding or changing the terminal stop condition PSCell includes: the terminal stops judging whether at least one candidate PSCell satisfies the trigger condition.
  • the terminal determines that the signal quality of the first cell to which it is currently connected is poor, and the terminal can stop judging at least one candidate Whether the PSCell meets the above trigger conditions.
  • the terminal stopping judging whether at least one candidate PSCell meets the above trigger condition may include: after the terminal stops for a preset period of time, determining the signal quality of the first cell, if the signal quality parameter of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first signal quality Parameter threshold value, continue to determine whether at least one candidate PSCell meets the above trigger condition; if the signal quality parameter of the first cell is less than the first signal quality parameter threshold value, the terminal stops the preset duration again.
  • the terminal stops judging whether at least one candidate PSCell meets the above triggering condition, and continues to detect the signal quality of the first cell, and when the signal quality parameter of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first signal quality parameter threshold, the terminal continues Determine whether at least one candidate PSCell meets the above-mentioned trigger condition.
  • the terminal when the signal quality parameter of the first cell is less than the first signal quality parameter threshold, the terminal ignores or deletes the configuration of at least one candidate PSCell.
  • the terminal ignoring the configuration of at least one candidate PSCell includes that the terminal maintains the current configuration, that is, the terminal does not perform an adding or changing process.
  • the terminal ignores or deletes the trigger condition.
  • the terminal when the signal quality of the first cell is poor, performs one or more of the following: the terminal determines the stop condition for the addition or change of the PSCell; or, the terminal ignores or deletes the configuration of at least one candidate PSCell; Or, the terminal ignores or deletes the trigger condition. Therefore, when the signal quality of the first cell is poor, the change of the conditional PSCell or the addition of the conditional PSCell is avoided, causing the problem that the signal quality of the terminal in the dual connection mode cannot be guaranteed and the user experience is poor.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a communication method. As shown in FIG. 18, in the case that the terminal determines that the signal quality parameter of the first cell is less than the first signal quality parameter threshold, after the above steps S1500-S1502, it may further include Step S1506.
  • the terminal determines the second access network device to which the candidate PSCell that meets the trigger condition belongs as the target MN, and the terminal releases the first Access network equipment; or, the terminal determines the second access network equipment to which the candidate PSCell that meets the trigger condition belongs as the target MN, and the terminal switches the first access network equipment to the target SN.
  • the terminal may select the second access network device to which the candidate PSCell with better signal quality that satisfies the trigger condition belongs to Determine as the first target MN, and release the MN (first access network device) with poor signal quality. This ensures that the signal quality of the MN connected to the terminal is better.
  • the terminal transmits data through the MN and the source SN at the same time.
  • the terminal may change The second access network device to which the candidate T-PSCell1 of the trigger condition with better signal quality belongs is determined as the target MN, and the MN is released. That is, the terminal can simultaneously transmit data through the target MN and the source SN.
  • the terminal in the case that the signal quality parameter of the first cell is less than the first signal quality parameter threshold, the terminal can assign the second access network device to which the candidate PSCell with better signal quality that meets the trigger condition belongs to Determine as the target MN, and switch the MN (first access network device) with poor signal quality to the target SN.
  • the terminal transmits data through the MN and the source SN at the same time.
  • the terminal may change The second access network device to which the candidate T-PSCell1 of the trigger condition with better signal quality belongs is determined as the target MN, and the MN is switched to the target SN. That is, the terminal can simultaneously transmit data through the target MN and the target SN.
  • the second access network device to which the candidate PSCell with better signal quality belongs can be determined as the target MN, thereby ensuring the signal of the target MN to which the terminal is connected The quality is better to improve data transmission efficiency and enhance user experience.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a communication method. As shown in FIG. 19, steps S1507-S1510 may be included before step S1500.
  • the first access network device respectively sends a sixth message to the second access network device to which the at least one candidate PSCell belongs, where the sixth message is used to request the second access network device to allocate radio resources for the terminal.
  • the sixth message includes indication information of conditional PSCell addition or conditional PSCell change.
  • the sixth message may be a conditional SN addition request message (Conditional SN Addition Request) or an SN addition request message (SN Addition Request).
  • the SN addition request message carries the indication information of PSCell addition.
  • the above trigger condition is when the terminal changes to the target PSCell and when the terminal changes to the target PSCell for inter-station handover, the sixth message may be a conditional SN addition request message or an SN addition request message.
  • the above trigger condition is when the terminal changes to the target PSCell, and when the terminal changes to the target PSCell is an intra-site handover, and the change of the PSCell is initiated by the MN, the sixth information can be a conditional SN modification request message (Conditional SN). Modification Request) or SN Modification Request message (SN Modification Request).
  • the above trigger condition is when the terminal changes to the target PSCell, and when the terminal changes to the target PSCell is an intra-site handover, and the change of the above PSCell is initiated by the SN, the sixth information can be a conditional SN modification request message (Conditional SN Modification Required) or SN Modification Request message (SN Modification Required).
  • the T-PSCell1 and T-PSCell2 are cells managed by base station 1
  • T-PSCell3 is a cell managed by base station 2.
  • the first access network device may send a sixth message to base station 1 and base station 2 respectively, requesting base station 1 and base station 2 to allocate wireless resources for the terminal.
  • the first access network device may send a sixth message to the second access network device, and the sixth message carries The first list, the sixth message is used to instruct each candidate PSCell of the second access network device to allocate corresponding radio resources for the terminal; or, when multiple candidate PSCells are the cells managed by a second access network device
  • the first access network device may send multiple sixth messages to the second access network device, and each sixth message is used to instruct a candidate PSCell managed by the second access network device to allocate a corresponding Wireless resources.
  • the second access network device to which the candidate PSCell belongs receives the sixth message.
  • the second access network device may receive a conditional SN addition request message or an SN addition request message.
  • the second access network device to which the candidate PSCell belongs sends a seventh message to the first access network device, where the seventh message includes the candidate PSCell configuration allocated by the second access network device.
  • the seventh message may be a conditional SN addition request confirmation message (Conditional SN Addition Request Acknowledge) or an SN addition request confirmation message (SN Addition Request Acknowledge).
  • the SN addition request confirmation message carries the indication information of PSCell addition or PSCell change.
  • the above trigger condition is when the terminal changes to the target PSCell and when the terminal changes to the target PSCell for inter-station handover, the seventh message may be a conditional SN addition request confirmation message or an SN addition request confirmation message.
  • the above trigger condition is when the terminal changes to the target PSCell, and when the terminal changes to the target PSCell is an intra-site handover, and the change of the PSCell is initiated by the MN, the seventh information can be a conditional SN modification request confirmation message (Conditional SN Modification Request Acknowledge) or SN Modification Request Acknowledge (SN Modification Request Acknowledge).
  • the above trigger condition is when the terminal changes to the target PSCell, and the terminal changes to the target PSCell for intra-site handover, and the change of the above PSCell is initiated by the SN.
  • the seventh information can be the conditional SN modification request confirmation message ( Conditional SN Modification Required Acknowledge or SN Modification Required Acknowledge (SN Modification Required Acknowledge).
  • the T-PSCell1 and T-PSCell2 are cells managed by base station 1
  • T-PSCell3 is a cell managed by base station 2.
  • base station 1 and base station 2 can accept the resource request sent by the first access network device
  • base station 1 can send a seventh message to the first access network device.
  • the seventh message includes T-PSCell1 and T-PSCell2 allocated by base station 1
  • the base station 2 may send a seventh message to the first access network device, and the seventh message includes the configuration of the T-PSCell3 allocated by the base station 2.
  • the configuration of the candidate PSCell allocated by the second access network device can be configured in full or incrementally.
  • the seventh message may also include an indication of full RRC configuration (full RRC configuration) or delta RRC configuration (delta RRC configuration).
  • the seventh message includes an indication of the incremental RRC configuration, before the above step S1507, the first access network device may request the current PSCell configuration from the source SN.
  • the first access network device receives the seventh message.
  • the first access network device may receive the conditional SN addition request confirmation message or the SN addition request confirmation message sent by the second access network device.
  • the first access network device may send an SN addition request message to the second access network device to which at least one candidate PSCell belongs, for requesting the second access network device to allocate resources for the terminal, and in the second access network device
  • the second access network device sends an SN addition request confirmation message carrying the candidate PSCell configuration to the first access network device, so that the first access network device can Send RRC reconfiguration information to the terminal to instruct the terminal to change or add PSCell.
  • steps S1511-S1514 may be further included after the above step S1501.
  • the first access network device sends an eighth message to the terminal, where the eighth message is used to instruct the terminal to add or change the PSCell.
  • the eighth message includes the second target PSCell configuration.
  • the eighth message may be an RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the eighth message sent by the first access network device to the terminal instructs the terminal to change the PSCell or add the PSCell.
  • step S1511 instructs the terminal to perform traditional PSCell addition or change without conditional judgment, that is, instructs the terminal to add or change to the second target PSCell.
  • the terminal is instructed to perform a PSCell condition or change with a conditional judgment, that is, it is necessary to determine the candidate PSCell that meets the trigger condition among at least one candidate PSCell as the first target PSCell, and then add or change to the first target PSCell PSCell. That is, after the first access network device initiates the adding or changing process of the conditional PSCell, it initiates the traditional adding or changing process of the PSCell.
  • the terminal stops the process of conditional PSCell addition or conditional PSCell change, and executes the process of adding PSCell or changing the PSCell.
  • the above process of adding a conditional PSCell or changing a conditional PSCell may include: the terminal compares the signal quality parameter of the first cell with the first signal quality parameter threshold, or the terminal determines whether the candidate PSCell meets the trigger condition.
  • the terminal when the terminal receives the eighth message from the first access network device, if the terminal is comparing the signal quality parameter of the first cell with the first signal quality parameter threshold, the terminal will stop comparing the signal of the first cell The size of the quality parameter and the first signal quality parameter threshold is added or changed to the second target PSCell.
  • the terminal receives the eighth message from the first access network device if the terminal is determining whether the candidate PSCell meets the trigger condition, the terminal will stop determining whether the candidate PSCell meets the trigger condition, add a second target PSCell or change to the second target PSCell. Two target PSCell.
  • the terminal can stop the conditional PSCell addition or conditional PSCell change process.
  • Perform the PSCell addition or PSCell change process That is, the priority of adding or changing the traditional PSCell is higher than the priority of adding or changing the conditional PSCell.
  • the terminal During the process of the terminal performing the conditional PSCell addition or the conditional PSCell change, if it receives the instruction of the traditional PSCell addition or the PSCell change, the terminal will stop the conditional PSCell addition or the conditional PSCell change process, and execute the PSCell addition or PSCell change Change process.
  • the terminal may continue to perform the conditional PSCell addition or conditional PSCell change process.
  • the terminal may delete the configuration of at least one candidate PSCell in the conditional PSCell addition or change procedure.
  • the terminal may also delete the trigger condition in the conditional PSCell addition or change procedure.
  • the terminal can stop the conditional PSCell addition or conditional PSCell change process and execute The process of adding PSCell or changing PSCell.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a communication method. As shown in FIG. 21, it is applied in the process of adding a conditional SN.
  • the method may include steps S2101-S2113.
  • the first access network device sends an SN addition request message to the second access network device to which at least one candidate PSCell belongs.
  • the SN addition request message carries an indication of condition addition or a condition indication.
  • the second access network device to which the at least one candidate PSCell belongs may be one or more, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the first access network device sends an SN addition request message to the at least one second access network device, respectively, Instruct the second access network device to allocate wireless resources for the terminal.
  • the first access network device may also send a conditional SN addition request message (Conditional SN Addition Request) to the second access network device to which at least one candidate PSCell belongs.
  • a conditional SN addition request message Conditional SN Addition Request
  • the second access network device to which at least one candidate PSCell in FIG. 21 belongs includes the second access network device to which the first target PSCell belongs and the second access network device to which the first candidate PSCell belongs.
  • the second access network device to which the candidate PSCell belongs receives an SN addition request message sent by the first access network device.
  • the second access network device to which the candidate PSCell belongs sends an SN addition request confirmation message to the first access network device.
  • the SN addition request confirmation message carries an indication of condition addition or a condition indication.
  • the second access network device accepts the resource request sent by the first access network device, the second access network device sends an SN addition request confirmation message to the first access network device, and the SN addition request
  • the confirmation message carries the configuration of the candidate PSCell allocated to the terminal by the second access network device.
  • the second access network device to which the candidate PSCell belongs in step S2103 may also send a Conditional SN Addition Request Acknowledge to the first access network device.
  • the first access network device receives the SN addition request confirmation message.
  • steps S2101-S2104 can be the same as steps S1507-S1510, and will not be described here.
  • the first access network device sends second information to the terminal, where the second information includes the first signal quality parameter threshold and a trigger condition, where the trigger condition is a trigger condition for the terminal to add the first target PSCell.
  • S2106 The terminal receives the second information.
  • the signal quality parameter of the first cell and the threshold value of the first signal quality parameter may be divided into two situations.
  • the terminal may perform steps S2107-S2111; in the case that the signal quality parameter of the first cell is less than the first signal quality parameter threshold
  • the terminal executes step S2112 or S2113.
  • steps S2107-S2111 which is the case 1 in FIG.
  • step S2112 which is the second case in FIG. 21; when the signal quality parameter of the first cell is less than the first signal quality parameter threshold, the terminal executes the step S2113 is the third situation in FIG. 21.
  • Case 1, Case 2, and Case 3 above are three parallel cases.
  • the terminal Based on the second information, the terminal determines the candidate PSCell that meets the trigger condition as the first target PSCell in the case that the signal quality parameter of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first signal quality parameter threshold.
  • steps S2105-S2107 can be the same as steps S1501-S1503, and will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal sends an RRC reconfiguration complete message to the first access network device.
  • the terminal applies the configuration of the first target PSCell and sends an RRC reconfiguration complete message to the first access network device, where the RRC reconfiguration complete message carries an indication that the first target PSCell is successfully added.
  • the first access network device sends an SN reconfiguration complete message to the second access network device to which the first target PSCell belongs.
  • the SN reconfiguration complete message carries an indication of conditional reconfiguration.
  • the first access network device may also send a conditional SN reconfiguration complete message to the second access network device to which the first target PSCell belongs to inform the second access network device to which the first target PSCell belongs ,
  • the terminal has completed the process of adding conditional PSCells.
  • S2110 The terminal initiates random access to the second access network device to which the first target PSCell belongs.
  • FIG. 21 only uses the first execution of S2108 and then the execution of S2110 as an example for illustration.
  • the first access network device sends a fifth message to the second access network device to which the first candidate PSCell belongs, and the fifth message is used to indicate the first
  • the second access network device to which the candidate PSCell belongs releases the configuration of the first candidate PSCell.
  • step S2111 may be the same as that of step S1504, and will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal performs one or more of the following: the terminal determines the stop condition to determine the addition or change of the PSCell; or, the terminal ignores or deletes it Configuration of at least one candidate PSCell; or, the terminal ignores or deletes the trigger condition.
  • the terminal determines the second access network device to which the candidate PSCell that meets the trigger condition belongs as the target MN, and the terminal releases the first Access network equipment; or, the terminal determines the second access network equipment to which the candidate PSCell that meets the trigger condition belongs as the target MN, and the terminal switches the first access network equipment to the target SN.
  • steps S2112-S2113 can be the same as steps S1505-S1506, and will not be repeated here.
  • the first access network device sends the first signal quality parameter threshold to the terminal, so that the terminal determines the signal quality of the first cell to which it is connected before determining the target PSCell If the signal quality of the first cell is good, the target PSCell is further determined, so that the signal quality of the first cell can be guaranteed before the terminal adds the PSCell, thereby ensuring the signal quality of the terminal in the dual connection mode and improving the user Experience.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a communication method. As shown in FIG. 22, it is applied in the process of changing the conditional PSCell initiated by the MN.
  • the method may include steps S2201-S2217.
  • the MN sends a sixth message to the second access network device to which at least one candidate PSCell belongs.
  • the MN is the first access network device in step S1501.
  • the sixth message may be a conditional SN addition request message or an SN addition request message.
  • the SN addition request message carries a condition change indication or condition indication.
  • the sixth information may be a conditional SN modification request message (Conditional SN Modification Request) or an SN modification request message (SN Modification Request).
  • the SN modification request message carries a condition change indication or condition indication.
  • the second access network device to which the at least one candidate PSCell belongs may be one or more, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the multiple candidate PSCells are cells managed by at least one second access network device, and the terminal changes to the target PSCell for inter-site handover, the first access network device communicates to at least one second access network device.
  • the network access device respectively sends an SN addition request message to instruct the second access network device to allocate wireless resources for the terminal.
  • the second access network device to which at least one candidate PSCell in FIG. 22 belongs includes the second access network device to which the first target PSCell belongs and the second access network device to which the first candidate PSCell belongs.
  • the second access network device to which the candidate PSCell belongs receives the sixth message sent by the MN.
  • the second access network device to which the candidate PSCell belongs sends a seventh message to the MN.
  • the seventh message may be a Conditional SN Addition Request Acknowledge or SN Addition Request Acknowledge.
  • the SN addition request confirmation message carries a condition change indication or condition indication.
  • the seventh information may be a conditional SN modification request confirmation message (Conditional SN Modification Request Acknowledge) or an SN modification request confirmation message (SN Modification Request Acknowledge).
  • the SN modification request confirmation message carries a condition change indication or condition indication.
  • the second access network device when the second access network device accepts the resource request sent by the MN, and the terminal changes to the target PSCell for inter-station handover, the second access network device sends an SN addition request confirmation message to the MN, and the SN addition request
  • the confirmation message carries the configuration of the candidate PSCell allocated to the terminal by the second access network device.
  • S2204 The MN receives the seventh message of the condition.
  • steps S2201-S2204 can be the same as steps S1507-S1510, and will not be repeated here.
  • S2205 The MN sends an SN release request message to the source SN.
  • the SN release request message is used to instruct the source SN to release its resources.
  • S2206 The source SN receives the SN release request message.
  • the source SN after the source SN receives the SN release request message, it no longer sends data to the terminal.
  • S2207 The source SN sends an SN release request confirmation message to the MN.
  • S2208 The MN receives the SN release request confirmation message.
  • the MN sends second information to the terminal, where the second information includes the first signal quality parameter threshold value and a trigger condition, where the trigger condition is a trigger condition for the terminal to change to the first target PSCell.
  • the terminal receives the second information.
  • the signal quality parameter of the first cell and the threshold value of the first signal quality parameter may be divided into two situations.
  • the terminal may perform steps S2211-S2215; in the case that the signal quality parameter of the first cell is less than the first signal quality parameter threshold
  • the terminal executes step S2216 or S2217.
  • steps S2211-S2215 which is the case 1 in FIG.
  • step S2216 which is the second case in FIG. 22; when the signal quality parameter of the first cell is less than the first signal quality parameter threshold, the terminal executes the step S2217 is the third situation in FIG. 22.
  • Case 1, Case 2, and Case 3 above are three parallel cases.
  • the terminal determines, based on the second information, a candidate PSCell that meets the trigger condition as the first target PSCell in the case that the signal quality parameter of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first signal quality parameter threshold.
  • steps S2209-S2211 can be the same as steps S1501-S1503, and will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal sends an RRC reconfiguration complete message to the MN.
  • the terminal applies the configuration of the first target PSCell, and sends an RRC reconfiguration complete message to the MN, where the RRC reconfiguration complete message carries an indication that the first target PSCell is successfully changed.
  • the MN sends an SN reconfiguration complete message to the second access network device to which the first target PSCell belongs.
  • the SN reconfiguration complete message carries an indication of conditional reconfiguration.
  • the MN may also send a conditional SN reconfiguration complete message to the second access network device to which the first target PSCell belongs to inform the second access network device to which the first target PSCell belongs that the terminal has completed the condition PSCell change process.
  • S2214 The terminal initiates random access to the second access network device to which the first target PSCell belongs.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the execution order of the foregoing step S2212 and step S2214, and FIG. 22 only takes the execution of S2212 first and then S2214 as an example for illustration.
  • the MN respectively sends a fifth message to the second access network device to which the first candidate PSCell belongs, where the fifth message is used to indicate the first candidate PSCell to which the first candidate PSCell belongs.
  • the second access network device releases the configuration of the first candidate PSCell.
  • step S2215 may be the same as that of step S1504, and will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal performs one or more of the following: the terminal determines the stop condition for determining the addition or change of PSCell; or, the terminal ignores or deletes Configuration of at least one candidate PSCell; or, the terminal ignores or deletes the trigger condition.
  • the terminal determines the second access network device to which the candidate PSCell that meets the trigger condition belongs as the target MN, and the terminal releases the MN; Alternatively, the terminal determines the second access network device to which the candidate PSCell that meets the trigger condition belongs as the target MN, and the terminal switches the MN to the target SN.
  • steps S2216-S2217 can be the same as steps S1505-S1506, and will not be repeated here.
  • the MN sends the first signal quality parameter threshold to the terminal, so that the terminal first determines the signal quality of the first cell connected to it before determining the target SN. And when the signal quality of the first cell is good, the target PSCell is further determined, so that the signal quality of the first cell before the terminal changes to the target PSCell can be guaranteed, thereby ensuring the signal quality of the terminal in the dual connection mode and improving the user Experience.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a communication method. As shown in FIG. 23, it is applied in the process of changing the conditional PSCell initiated by the SN.
  • the method may include steps S2301-S2317.
  • the source SN sends an SN change request message to the MN, where the SN change request message is used to indicate the condition SN change.
  • the SN Change request message (SN Change required) includes the identifier of at least one candidate PSCell and its corresponding configuration.
  • the SN change request message may also include the measurement result of the candidate PSCell, and the measurement result is used to assist the MN in determining whether to receive the change request of the conditional PSCell.
  • the SN change request message may add a condition change indication or a condition indication.
  • the source SN may also send a Conditional SN Change request message (Conditional SN Change required) to the MN.
  • a Conditional SN Change request message (Conditional SN Change required)
  • the MN receives the SN change request message.
  • the MN sends a sixth message to the second access network device to which at least one candidate PSCell belongs.
  • the MN is the first access network device in step S1501.
  • the sixth message may be a conditional SN addition request message or an SN addition request message.
  • the SN addition request message carries a condition change indication or condition indication.
  • the sixth information may be a conditional SN modification request message (Conditional SN Modification Required) or an SN modification request message (SN Modification Required).
  • the SN modification request message carries a condition change indication or condition indication.
  • the second access network device to which the at least one candidate PSCell belongs may be one or more, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the at least one candidate PSCell is a cell managed by multiple second access network devices, and the terminal changes to the target PSCell for inter-station handover, the first access network devices respectively Send an SN add request message to multiple second access network devices to instruct the second access network device to allocate wireless resources for the terminal.
  • the second access network device to which at least one candidate PSCell in FIG. 23 belongs includes the second access network device to which the first target PSCell belongs and the second access network device to which the first candidate PSCell belongs.
  • the second access network device to which the candidate PSCell belongs receives the sixth message.
  • the second access network device to which the candidate PSCell belongs sends a seventh message to the MN.
  • the seventh message may be a conditional SN addition request confirmation message or an SN addition request confirmation message.
  • the SN addition request confirmation message carries a condition change indication or condition indication.
  • the seventh information may be a conditional SN modification request confirmation message (Conditional SN Modification Required Acknowledge) or an SN modification request confirmation message (SN Modification Required Acknowledge).
  • the SN modification application confirmation message carries a condition change indication or condition indication.
  • the second access network device to which the candidate PSCell belongs when the second access network device to which the candidate PSCell belongs accepts the resource request sent by the MN, and the terminal changes to the target PSCell for inter-station handover, the second access network device to which the candidate PSCell belongs sends the SN to the MN An addition request confirmation message, where the SN addition request confirmation message carries the configuration of the candidate PSCell allocated by the second access network device to the terminal.
  • the MN receives the seventh message.
  • steps S2303-S2306 can be the same as steps S1507-S1510, and will not be repeated here.
  • the MN sends second information to the terminal.
  • the second information includes the first signal quality parameter threshold and a trigger condition, where the trigger condition is a trigger condition for the terminal to change to the first target PSCell.
  • S2308 The terminal receives the second information.
  • the signal quality parameter of the first cell and the threshold value of the first signal quality parameter may be divided into two situations.
  • the terminal may perform steps S2309-S2315; in the case that the signal quality parameter of the first cell is less than the first signal quality parameter threshold
  • the terminal executes step S2316 or S2317.
  • steps S2309-S2315 which is the case 1 in FIG.
  • step S2316 which is the second case in FIG. 23; when the signal quality parameter of the first cell is less than the first signal quality parameter threshold, the terminal executes the step S2317 is the third situation in FIG. 23.
  • Case 1, Case 2, and Case 3 above are three parallel cases.
  • the terminal Based on the second information, the terminal determines a candidate PSCell that meets the trigger condition as the first target PSCell in the case that the signal quality parameter of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first signal quality parameter threshold.
  • steps S2307-S2309 can be the same as steps S1501-S1503, and will not be repeated here.
  • S2310 The terminal sends an RRC reconfiguration complete message to the MN.
  • the terminal applies the configuration of the first target PSCell, and sends an RRC reconfiguration complete message to the MN, where the RRC reconfiguration complete message carries an indication that the first target PSCell is successfully changed.
  • the MN sends an SN change confirmation message to the source SN.
  • the SN change confirmation message is used to confirm the release of the source SN.
  • the SN change confirmation message carries a change instruction.
  • the MN may also send a conditional SN change confirmation message to the source SN.
  • the source SN receives the SN change confirmation message.
  • the source SN After the source SN receives the SN change confirmation message, it will release the resources previously allocated to the terminal and stop sending data to the terminal.
  • the MN sends an SN reconfiguration complete message to the second access network device to which the first target PSCell belongs.
  • the SN reconfiguration complete message carries an indication of conditional reconfiguration.
  • the MN may also send a conditional SN reconfiguration complete message to the second access network device to which the first target PSCell belongs to inform the second access network device to which the first target PSCell belongs that the terminal has completed the condition PSCell change process.
  • the terminal initiates random access to the second access network device to which the first target PSCell belongs.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the execution sequence of the foregoing step S2310 and step S2314, and FIG. 23 only uses S2310 first and then S2314 as an example for illustration.
  • the MN sends a fifth message to the second access network device to which the first candidate PSCell belongs, and the fifth message is used to indicate the first candidate PSCell to which the first candidate PSCell belongs. 2.
  • the access network device releases the SCG configuration of the first candidate SN.
  • step S2315 may be the same as that of step S1504, and will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal performs one or more of the following: the terminal determines the stop condition for determining the addition or change of PSCell; or, the terminal ignores or deletes Configuration of at least one candidate PSCell; or, the terminal ignores or deletes the trigger condition.
  • the terminal determines the second access network device to which the candidate PSCell that meets the trigger condition belongs as the target MN, and the terminal releases the MN; Alternatively, the terminal determines the second access network device to which the candidate PSCell that meets the trigger condition belongs as the target MN, and the terminal switches the MN to the target SN.
  • steps S2316-S2317 can be the same as steps S1505-S1506, and will not be repeated here.
  • the embodiment of the application sends the first signal quality parameter threshold value to the terminal through the MN, so that the terminal first determines the signal quality of the first cell to which it is connected before determining the target SN. And when the signal quality of the first cell is good, the target PSCell is further determined, so that the signal quality of the first cell before the terminal changes to the target PSCell can be guaranteed, thereby ensuring the signal quality of the terminal in the dual connection mode and improving the user Experience.
  • This application also provides a communication method. As shown in FIG. 24, the communication method includes steps S2401-S2404.
  • the first MN determines a trigger condition, and the trigger condition is a trigger condition for the terminal to switch to the target MN and change to the target SN.
  • the first MN is the MN when the terminal is in dual-connection communication before the terminal is handed over to the target MN.
  • the trigger condition includes a second signal quality parameter threshold value.
  • the trigger condition is used for the terminal to determine the target MN and the target SN at the same time according to the result of the function of the signal quality parameter of a candidate MN and the signal quality parameter of the candidate SN corresponding to the candidate MN.
  • the above-mentioned signal quality parameters include: reference signal received power RSRP, reference signal received quality RSRQ, received signal strength indicator RSSI, and signal to interference plus noise ratio SINR. It is not limited.
  • the function of the signal quality parameter of a candidate MN and the signal quality parameter of the candidate SN corresponding to the candidate MN may include: a weighted sum of the signal quality parameter of the candidate MN and the signal quality parameter of the candidate SN corresponding to the candidate MN. It should be noted that the function may also have other functional relationships, which are not limited in the embodiment of the present application. Here, only the above functional relationship is used as the weighted sum of the signal quality parameters for illustration.
  • the candidate MNs are T-MN1 and T-MN2, the at least one candidate SN corresponding to T-MN1 is T-SN1 and T-SN2, and the at least one candidate SN corresponding to T-MN2 is T-SN3 and T- Take SN4 as an example.
  • the above trigger conditions are used by the terminal according to the result of the weighted sum of the signal quality parameters of T-MN1 and its corresponding T-SN1, the result of the weighted sum of signal quality parameters of T-MN1 and its corresponding T-SN2, T-MN2 and The result of the weighted sum of the signal quality parameters of the corresponding T-SN3, and the result of the weighted sum of the signal quality parameters of the T-MN2 and its corresponding T-SN4, determine the target MN and the target SN.
  • the above trigger condition may further include: a first weight corresponding to the candidate MN (or information indicating the first weight), and a second weight corresponding to the candidate SN (or information indicating the second weight).
  • the terminal may determine the target MN and the target SN at the same time according to each candidate MN, the signal quality parameter of the candidate SN corresponding to the candidate MN, the first weight and the second weight.
  • the above-mentioned first weight and second weight are used to calculate the weighted sum of the signal quality parameters of the candidate MN and its corresponding candidate SN.
  • the first MN sends third information to the terminal.
  • the third information includes the identification of at least one candidate MN, the identification of at least one candidate SN corresponding to each candidate MN, the MCG configuration of at least one candidate MN, the SCG configuration of at least one candidate SN, and the trigger condition in step S2401.
  • the foregoing third information may be in an RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the terminal receives the third information from the first MN.
  • S2404 The terminal determines the target MN and the target SN.
  • the result of the function of the signal quality parameter of the target MN and the signal quality parameter of the target SN is greater than or equal to the first signal quality parameter threshold.
  • the target SN is an SN corresponding to the target MN.
  • the terminal may calculate the sum of the signal quality parameters of each candidate MN and the candidate SN corresponding to each candidate MN, and compare the signal quality parameters of each candidate MN and the candidate SN corresponding to each candidate MN.
  • the candidate MN and the candidate SN whose sum is greater than or equal to the second signal quality parameter threshold are determined as the target MN and the target SN.
  • the candidate MNs are T-MN1 and T-MN2
  • at least one candidate SN corresponding to T-MN1 is T-SN1 and T-SN2
  • at least one candidate SN corresponding to T-MN2 is T-SN3 and T-SN4 as example.
  • the terminal can calculate the sum of signal quality parameters of T-MN1 and T-SN1 P1, the sum of signal quality parameters of T-MN1 and T-SN2 P2, the sum of signal quality parameters of T-MN2 and T-SN3 P3, T -The sum of signal quality parameters of MN2 and T-SN4 P4, the candidate MN and candidate SN whose sum of signal quality parameters in each group of candidate MN and candidate SN is greater than or equal to the second signal quality parameter threshold is determined as the target MN And target SN.
  • the above step S2404 includes: the terminal according to the signal quality parameter of each candidate MN, the candidate MN corresponds to The signal quality parameter of a candidate SN, the first weight and the second weight, determine the weighted sum of the signal quality parameters of the candidate MN and the candidate SN; the terminal will determine the weighted sum of the candidate MN that is greater than or equal to the second signal quality parameter threshold And candidate SNs are determined as target MN and target SN.
  • the sum of the foregoing first weight and second weight may be 1.
  • the first weight may be greater than or equal to the second weight.
  • the first weight may be 1, and the second weight may be 0.
  • the first weight may be 0.5, and the second weight may also be 0.5.
  • the first weight may be 0.6, and the second weight may be 0.4.
  • the candidate MNs are T-MN1 and T-MN2
  • at least one candidate SN corresponding to T-MN1 is T-SN1 and T-SN2
  • at least one candidate SN corresponding to T-MN2 is T-SN3 and T-SN4
  • the terminal can calculate the weighted sum of the signal quality parameters of T-MN1 and T-SN1 respectively W1, the weighted sum of signal quality parameters of T-MN1 and T-SN2 and W2, the weighted sum of signal quality parameters of T-MN2 and T-SN3 W3, the weighted sum of the signal quality parameters of T-MN2 and T-SN4 W4, the weighted sum of the signal quality parameters in each group of candidate MNs and candidate SNs is greater than or equal to the second signal quality parameter threshold value of the candidate MN and candidate SN , Determined as the target MN and target SN.
  • the target MN and the target SN can be determined simultaneously through the condition combination of conditional MN switching and conditional SN change. Compared with the method of first determining the target MN by triggering conditions and then determining the target SN, this solution can determine the target MN and the target SN at the same time.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a communication method. As shown in FIG. 25, the method may include steps S2405-S2406 in addition to the foregoing steps S2401-S2404, for example, after the foregoing step S2402.
  • the first MN sends a ninth message to the first SN, where the ninth message is used to instruct the first SN not to initiate a conditional SN change.
  • the first MN is the MN when the terminal is in dual-connection communication before the terminal changes to the target MN.
  • the first SN is the SN of the terminal during dual-connection communication before the terminal changes to the target SN. That is, the first MN is the source MN, and the first SN is the source SN.
  • the first MN may send indication information to the first SN (source SN) to instruct the source SN not to initiate The condition SN is changed, so as to avoid the problem of possible collisions between different changing scenarios.
  • the terminal after receiving the ninth information, the terminal no longer initiates the conditional SN change process.
  • the source MN after the source MN initiates the conditional SN change with the conditional SN change to the terminal, the source SN is instructed not to initiate the conditional SN change, thereby avoiding the problem of possible collisions between different change situations.
  • This application also provides a communication method. As shown in FIG. 26, the communication method includes steps S2601-S2604.
  • the first MN determines a trigger condition, and the trigger condition is a trigger condition for the terminal to switch to the target MN and change to the target PSCell.
  • the first MN is the MN when the terminal is in dual-connection communication before the terminal changes to the target MN.
  • the trigger condition includes a second signal quality parameter threshold value.
  • the trigger condition is used for the terminal to simultaneously determine the target MN and the target PSCell based on the result of the function of the signal quality parameter of a candidate MN and the signal quality parameter of the candidate PSCell corresponding to the candidate MN.
  • the function of the signal quality parameter of a candidate MN and the signal quality parameter of the candidate PSCell corresponding to the candidate MN may include: a weighted sum of the signal quality parameter of the candidate MN and the signal quality parameter of the candidate PSCell corresponding to the candidate MN. It should be noted that the function may also have other functional relationships, which are not limited in the embodiment of the present application. Here, only the above functional relationship is taken as the sum of signal quality parameters for illustration.
  • the candidate MNs are T-MN1 and T-MN2, the at least one candidate PSCell corresponding to T-MN1 is T-PSCell1 and T-PSCell2, and the at least one candidate PSCell corresponding to T-MN2 is T-PSCell3 and T-PSCell.
  • PSCell4 Take PSCell4 as an example.
  • the above trigger conditions are used by the terminal according to the result of the weighted sum of the signal quality parameters of T-MN1 and its corresponding T-PSCell1, the result of the weighted sum of signal quality parameters of T-MN1 and its corresponding T-PSCell2, and T-MN2 Determine the target MN and the target PSCell based on the result of the weighted sum of the signal quality parameters of the corresponding T-PSCell3, and the result of the weighted sum of the signal quality parameters of the T-MN2 and its corresponding T-PSCell4.
  • the trigger condition further includes a first weight corresponding to the candidate MN (or information indicating the first weight), and a second weight corresponding to the candidate PSCell (or information indicating the second weight).
  • the terminal may determine the target MN and the target SN at the same time according to each candidate MN, the signal quality parameter of the candidate PSCell corresponding to the candidate MN, the first weight and the second weight.
  • the foregoing first weight and second weight are used to calculate the weighted sum of the signal quality parameters of the candidate MN and its corresponding candidate PSCell.
  • the PSCell to which the terminal is connected may be a cell managed by different access network equipment, or may be a cell managed by the same access network equipment.
  • the PSCell that the terminal is connected to is a cell managed by the same access network equipment as the target PSCell, and when the terminal changes to the PSCell, the connected access network equipment does not change, which can be called It is the handover of PSCell in the station.
  • the PSCell that the terminal is connected to is a cell managed by different access network equipment from the target PSCell.
  • the connected access network equipment changes, which can be called a station.
  • Switch between PSCells The embodiment of the present application does not limit whether the PSCell within the station is switched or the PSCell is switched between stations when the terminal changes to the target PSCell.
  • the first MN sends fourth information to the terminal.
  • the fourth information includes the identification of at least one candidate MN, the identification of at least one candidate PSCell corresponding to each candidate MN, the MCG configuration of the primary cell group of at least one candidate MN, the configuration of the at least one candidate PSCell, and the trigger in step S2601 condition.
  • the foregoing fourth information may be in an RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the terminal receives fourth information from the first MN.
  • S2604 The terminal determines the target MN and the target PSCell.
  • the result of the function of the signal quality parameter of the target MN and the signal quality parameter of the target PSCell is greater than or equal to the first signal quality parameter threshold.
  • the target PSCell is a PSCell corresponding to the target MN.
  • the terminal may calculate the sum of the signal quality parameters of each candidate MN and the candidate PSCell corresponding to each candidate MN, and compare the signal quality parameters of each candidate MN and the candidate PSCell corresponding to each candidate MN.
  • the candidate MN and the candidate PSCell whose sum is greater than or equal to the second signal quality parameter threshold are determined as the target MN and the target PSCell.
  • the candidate MNs are T-MN1 and T-MN2
  • at least one candidate PSCell corresponding to T-MN1 is T-PSCell1 and T-PSCell2
  • at least one candidate PSCell corresponding to T-MN2 is T-PSCell3 and T-PSCell4.
  • the terminal can calculate the weighted sum of signal quality parameters of T-MN1 and T-PSCell1, P1, the weighted sum of signal quality parameters of T-MN1 and T-PSCell2, and P2, the weighted sum of signal quality parameters of T-MN2 and T-PSCell3, respectively.
  • the weighted sum of the signal quality parameters of T-MN2 and T-PSCell4 P4 is greater than or equal to the second signal quality parameter threshold.
  • Candidate MNs and candidate PSCells Determined as the target MN and target PSCell.
  • the above step S2604 includes: the terminal according to the signal quality parameter of each candidate MN, the candidate MN corresponds to The signal quality parameter of a candidate PSCell, the first weight and the second weight, determine the weighted sum of the signal quality parameters of the candidate MN and the candidate PSCell; the terminal will determine the weighted sum of the candidate MN that is greater than or equal to the second signal quality parameter threshold And candidate PSCells are determined as the target MN and target PSCell.
  • the sum of the foregoing first weight and second weight may be 1.
  • the first weight may be greater than or equal to the second weight.
  • the first weight may be 1, and the second weight may be 0.
  • the first weight may be 0.5, and the second weight may also be 0.5.
  • the first weight may be 0.6, and the second weight may be 0.4.
  • candidate MNs are T-MN1 and T-MN2
  • at least one candidate PSCell corresponding to T-MN1 is T-PSCell1 and T-PSCell2
  • at least one candidate PSCell corresponding to T-MN2 is T-PSCell3 and T-PSCell4
  • the terminal can calculate the weighted sum of signal quality parameters of T-MN1 and T-PSCell1 and W1, the weighted sum of signal quality parameters of T-MN1 and T-PSCell2, and the weighted sum of signal quality parameters of T-MN2 and T-PSCell3, respectively.
  • W3 the weighted sum of the signal quality parameters of T-MN2 and T-PSCell4.
  • W4 the weighted sum of the signal quality parameters in each group of candidate MNs and candidate PSCells is greater than or equal to the second signal quality parameter threshold.
  • Candidate MNs and candidate PSCells Determined as the target MN and target PSCell.
  • the target MN and the target PSCell can be determined at the same time through the condition combination of the conditional MN handover and the conditional PSCell change. Compared with the method of first determining the target MN by triggering conditions and then determining the target PSCell, this solution can simultaneously determine the target MN and the target PSCell.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a communication method. As shown in FIG. 27, the method may further include steps S2605-S2606 in addition to the foregoing steps S2601-S2602, for example, after S2602.
  • the first MN sends a tenth message to the first SN, where the tenth message is used to instruct the first SN not to initiate a conditional PSCell change.
  • the first MN is the MN when the terminal is in dual-connection communication before the terminal changes to the target MN.
  • the first SN is the SN of the terminal during dual-connection communication before the terminal changes to the target PSCell. That is, the first MN may be the source MN. Before the target PSCell and the terminal are changed to the target PSCell, and the PSCell to which the terminal is connected is a cell managed by different access network equipment, the first SN may be the source SN.
  • the PSCell that the terminal is connected to and the target PSCell are cells managed by different access network equipment as an example.
  • the source MN Indication information can be sent to the source SN to instruct the source SN not to initiate a conditional PSCell change, thereby avoiding the problem of possible collisions between different change scenarios.
  • the first SN receives the tenth information.
  • the terminal after receiving the tenth information, the terminal no longer initiates the conditional PSCell change process.
  • the source MN after the source MN initiates a conditional MN handover with a conditional PSCell change to the terminal, the source SN is instructed not to initiate a conditional PSCell change, so as to avoid the problem of possible collisions between different change situations.
  • this embodiment of the present application also provides a method.
  • the first MN after the first MN initiates a conditional MN handover with a conditional SN/PSCell change, the first MN does not support the first MN.
  • An SN initiates a conditional SN/PSCell change; or, after the first MN initiates a conditional SN/PSCell change with a conditional MN handover, the first MN does not initiate a conditional SN/PSCell change, thereby avoiding possible collisions between different changes. .
  • FIG. 28 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 2800.
  • the communication device 2800 may be used to implement the method described in the foregoing method embodiment, and reference may be made to the description in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the communication device 2800 may be a chip, a network device (such as a base station), or a terminal device.
  • the communication device 2800 includes one or more processors 2801.
  • the processor 2801 may be a general-purpose processor or a special-purpose processor.
  • it can be a baseband processor or a central processing unit.
  • the baseband processor can be used to process communication protocols and communication data
  • the central processor can be used to control devices (such as base stations, terminals, or chips, etc.), execute software programs, and process data in the software programs.
  • the device may include a transceiving unit to implement signal input (reception) and output (transmission).
  • the device may be a chip, and the transceiver unit may be an input and/or output circuit of the chip, or a communication interface.
  • the chip can be used in terminal equipment or network equipment (such as a base station).
  • the device may be a terminal device or a network device (such as a base station), and the transceiver unit may be a transceiver, a radio frequency chip, or the like.
  • the communication device 2800 includes one or more of the processors 2801, and the one or more processors 2801 can implement the method of the network device or the terminal device in the embodiment shown in any one of FIGS. 6-27.
  • the communication device 2800 includes means for receiving first information from a first access network device, and means for receiving signals in the first cell based on the first information.
  • the quality parameter is greater than or equal to the first signal quality parameter threshold
  • the candidate SN that meets the trigger condition is determined as a means of the first target SN.
  • the first information may be received through a transceiver, or an input/output circuit, or an interface of a chip.
  • the first information reference may be made to related descriptions in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the communication device 2800 includes a means for determining a threshold value of a first signal quality parameter, and a means for sending first information to the terminal.
  • the first information may be sent through a transceiver, or an input/output circuit, or an interface of a chip.
  • the first information reference may be made to related descriptions in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the communication device 2800 may further include components that implement the steps in the method of the network device or the terminal device in any one of the embodiments shown in FIG. 6 to FIG. 27, and details are not repeated here.
  • the processor 2801 may implement other functions in addition to implementing the methods in one or more of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 6-27.
  • the processor 2801 may also include instructions 2803, which may be executed on the processor, so that the communication device 2800 executes the methods described in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the communication device 2800 may also include a circuit, and the circuit may implement the functions of the network device or the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the communication device 2800 may include one or more memories 2802, on which a program (or instructions or code) 2804 is stored, and the program 2804 can be run by the processor 2801, so that the communication device 2800 executes the method described in the above method embodiment.
  • the memory 2802 may also store data.
  • the processor 2801 may also read data (for example, predefined information) stored in the memory 2802. The data may be stored at the same storage address as the program 2804, and the data may also be stored at a different storage address than the program 1804. Storage address.
  • the communication device 2800 may further include a transceiver unit 2805 and an antenna 2806, or include a communication interface.
  • the transceiver unit 2805 may be called a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., and is used to implement the transceiver function of the device through the antenna 2806.
  • the communication interface (not shown in the figure) may be used for communication between the core network device and the network device, or between the network device and the network device.
  • the communication interface may be a wired communication interface, such as an optical fiber communication interface.
  • the processor 2801 may be called a processing unit, and controls a device (such as a terminal or a base station).
  • the sending or receiving performed by the transceiver unit 2805 described in the embodiment of this application is under the control of the processing unit (processor 2801), the sending or receiving action can also be described as processing in the embodiment of this application.
  • the execution by the unit (processor 2801) does not affect the understanding of the solution by those skilled in the art.
  • the embodiments of the present application may divide the communication device into functional modules according to the foregoing method examples.
  • each functional module may be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions may be integrated into one processing module.
  • the above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or software function modules. It should be noted that the division of modules in the embodiments of the present application is illustrative, and is only a logical function division, and there may be other division methods in actual implementation.
  • FIG. 29 shows a possible structural diagram of a communication device.
  • the communication device may be an access network device or a chip for an access network device.
  • the access network device may Perform operations of the first access network node, MN, or first MN in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the communication device 2900 includes: a processing unit 2901, a first transceiving unit 2902, and a second transceiving unit 2903.
  • the first transceiving unit 2902 may be a transceiving unit between a base station and a terminal, and the first transceiving unit 2902 may be implemented by a first transceiver.
  • the first transceiver may include a transceiver and an antenna for communication between the communication device 2900 and the terminal.
  • the second transceiver unit 2903 may be a transceiver unit between the base station and the base station, and the second transceiver unit 2903 may be implemented by a second transceiver.
  • the second transceiver may be a communication interface for communication between the communication device 2900 and other network devices.
  • the processing unit 2901 is configured to control and manage the actions of the aforementioned communication device 2900, and is configured to execute the processing performed by the first access network node, MN, or first MN in the aforementioned embodiment.
  • the processing unit 2901 may also execute programs or instructions stored in the memory, so that the communication device 2900 implements the methods and functions involved in any of the foregoing embodiments.
  • the processing unit 2901 may be used to determine the first signal quality parameter threshold, trigger condition, second signal quality parameter threshold, candidate SN, and candidate PSCell in the foregoing embodiment, and/or used in this document Other processes of the described technique.
  • the processing unit 2901 may be used to execute step S600 in FIG. 6, or step S1501 in FIG. 15, or, step S2401 in FIG. 24, or step S2601 in FIG. 26.
  • the first transceiving unit 2902 may be used to execute S601 in FIG. 6 or FIG. 7 or FIG. 8 or FIG. 9 or FIG. 10, or, S601 and S611 in FIG. 11, or, the steps in FIG. 12 S1205, or, S1309 in Figure 13, or, S1407 in Figure 14, or, S1501 in Figure 15 or Figure 16 or Figure 17 or Figure 18 or 19 or 20, or, S1501 and S1511 in Figure 20, or , S2105 in Figure 21, or, S2209 in Figure 22, or, S2307 in Figure 23, or, S2402 in Figure 24, or, S2602 in Figure 26, and/or for the technology described herein Other processes. Among them, all relevant content of the steps involved in the above method embodiments can be cited in the functional description of the corresponding functional module, which will not be repeated here.
  • the second transceiver unit 2903 can be used to perform, for example, S604 in FIG. 7, S607 and S610 in FIG. 10, or steps S1201, S1204, S1209, and S1211 in FIG. 12, or S1301, S1304, and S1305 in FIG.
  • a processor may perform the functions of the processing unit 2901, the communication interface may perform the functions of the first transceiver unit 2902, and the transceiver (transmitter/receiver) may perform the second transceiver unit 2903.
  • the processing unit 2901 may be embedded in the processor of the communication device in the form of hardware or independent of the processor of the communication device, or may be stored in the memory of the communication device 2900 in the form of software, so that the processor can call and execute the operations corresponding to the above functional units.
  • the hardware structure of the communication device 2900 is shown in FIG. 28, and the description of all related content of the components involved in FIG. 28 can be quoted from the functional description of the corresponding components of the communication device 2900, which will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 30 shows a possible structural schematic diagram of a communication device.
  • the communication device may be the terminal in the foregoing embodiment, or a device used for the terminal, such as a chip.
  • the communication device 3000 includes a processing unit 3001 and a transceiver unit 3002.
  • the processing unit 3001 is used to control and manage the actions of the aforementioned communication device 3000, and is used to execute the processing operations performed by the terminal in the aforementioned embodiment.
  • the processing unit 3001 It is also possible to execute programs or instructions stored in the memory, so that the communication device 3000 implements the methods and functions involved in any of the foregoing embodiments.
  • the processing unit 3001 can be used to execute S603 in FIG. 6, or, S605 in FIG. 8, or, S606 in FIG. 9, or, S613 and S614 in FIG. 11, or, S1207, S1212, or S1207 in FIG.
  • the transceiver unit 3002 may be used to execute S602 in FIG. 6, or, S602 and S612 in FIG. 11, or, steps S1206, S1208, and S1210 in FIG. 12, or, S1310, S1312, and S1312 in FIG. S1314, or, S1408, S1410, and S1414 in Figure 14, or, S1502 in Figure 15, or, S1502 and S1512 in Figure 20, or, S2106, S2108, and S2110 in Figure 21, or, in Figure 22 S2210, S2212, and S2214, or, S2308, S2310, and S314 in FIG. 23, or, S2403 in FIG. 24, or, S2603 in FIG. 26, and/or other processes used in the techniques described herein.
  • all relevant content of the steps involved in the above method embodiments can be cited in the functional description of the corresponding functional module, and will not be repeated here.
  • the communication device 3000 may be the communication device shown in FIG. 5, the processing unit 3001 may be the processor 501 in FIG. 5, and the transceiving unit 3002 may be the transceiver 503 in FIG.
  • the communication device 3000 may further include a memory, and the memory is used to store the program code and data corresponding to any of the communication methods provided above by the communication device 3000.
  • the description of all related content of the components involved in FIG. 5 can be cited in the functional description of the corresponding components of the communication device 3000, and will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal equipment and network equipment in each of the above apparatus embodiments may completely correspond to the terminal equipment or network equipment in the method embodiments, and the corresponding modules or units execute the corresponding steps.
  • the above-mentioned receiving unit may be an interface circuit used by the chip to receive signals from other chips or devices.
  • the above sending unit is an interface circuit of the device for sending signals to other devices.
  • the sending unit is the chip for sending signals to other chips or devices.
  • the interface circuit when the device is implemented as a chip, the sending unit is the chip for sending signals to other chips or devices.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device, which includes a processor, and the processor is configured to execute computer-executed instructions to support a terminal device to implement the communication method in any of the embodiments in FIG. 6 to FIG. 27.
  • the communication device may further include a transceiver and a memory.
  • the transceiver is used for sending and receiving information or communicating with other network elements; and the memory is used for storing instructions to be executed by the computer.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device.
  • the communication device includes a processor, and the processor is configured to execute instructions executed by a computer to support access network equipment such as a base station to implement any one of the embodiments in FIG. 6 to FIG. 27.
  • Communication method may further include a transceiver and a memory.
  • the transceiver is used for sending and receiving information or communicating with other network elements; and the memory is used for storing instructions to be executed by the computer.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer storage medium in which computer program code is stored.
  • the electronic device executes the communication in any one of the embodiments in FIG. 6 to FIG. 27. method.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, which when the computer program product runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the communication method in any of the embodiments in FIGS. 6-27.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device, which can exist in the form of a chip product.
  • the structure of the device includes a processor and an interface circuit.
  • the processor is used to communicate with other devices through a receiving circuit so that the device can execute The communication method in any one of the embodiments in FIG. 6 to FIG. 27 described above.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a communication system, including a terminal and an access network device, and the terminal and the access network device can execute the communication method in any one of the embodiments in FIG. 6 to FIG. 27.
  • the steps of the method or algorithm described in combination with the disclosure of this application can be implemented in a hardware manner, or can be implemented in a manner in which a processor executes software instructions.
  • Software instructions can be composed of corresponding software modules, which can be stored in random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), flash memory, erasable programmable read-only memory (Erasable Programmable ROM, EPROM), and electrically erasable Programmable read-only memory (Electrically EPROM, EEPROM), register, hard disk, mobile hard disk, CD-ROM or any other form of storage medium known in the art.
  • An exemplary storage medium is coupled to the processor, so that the processor can read information from the storage medium and write information to the storage medium.
  • the storage medium may also be an integral part of the processor.
  • the processor and the storage medium may be located in the ASIC.
  • the ASIC may be located in the core network interface device.
  • the processor and storage medium can also exist as discrete components in the core network interface device.
  • the functions described in this application can be implemented by hardware, software, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented by software, these functions can be stored in a computer-readable medium or transmitted as one or more instructions or codes on the computer-readable medium.
  • the computer-readable medium includes a computer storage medium and a communication medium, where the communication medium includes any medium that facilitates the transfer of a computer program from one place to another.
  • the storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a general-purpose or special-purpose computer.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请实施例公开了一种通信方法和装置，涉及通信技术领域，解决了现有技术中将条件切换机制与DC场景相结合时，可能造成终端在双连接模式的信号质量不能得到保证，用户体验较差的问题。具体方案为：终端接收来自第一接入网设备的第一信息，第一信息包括第一信号质量参数门限值和触发条件，触发条件为终端变更至第一目标辅节点SN或添加第一目标SN的触发条件；终端基于第一信息，在第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，将满足触发条件的候选SN确定为第一目标SN；第一小区为第一接入网设备管理的小区。

Description

一种通信方法和装置 技术领域
本申请实施例涉及通信技术领域，尤其涉及一种通信方法和装置。
背景技术
用户设备(User Equipment，UE)工作在双连接(Dual Connectivity，DC)模式下时，UE可以同时通过主节点(Master Node，MN)和辅节点(Secondary Node，SN)进行数据传输。现有协议支持DC场景下的切换，例如，MN或SN发起的条件主辅小区(Primary Secondary Cell，PSCell)的添加或变更，或，SN的添加或变更(MN/SN initiated Conditional PSCell/SN Addition/Change)。
但是，在将条件切换(conditional handover，CHO)机制与DC场景下的切换相结合时，由于触发条件的下发与终端判断候选SN是否满足触发条件的时间存在时间差，因此，可能造成终端在双连接模式的信号质量不能得到保证，用户体验较差。
发明内容
本申请实施例提供一种通信方法和装置，能够确保终端在双连接模式的信号质量，提升用户体验。
为达到上述目的，本申请实施例采用如下技术方案：
本申请实施例的第一方面，提供一种通信方法，该方法包括：终端接收来自第一接入网设备的第一信息，该第一信息包括第一信号质量参数门限值和触发条件，该触发条件为终端变更至第一目标辅节点SN或添加该第一目标SN的触发条件；该终端基于上述第一信息，在第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于上述第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，将满足上述触发条件的候选SN确定为上述第一目标SN；该第一小区为上述第一接入网设备管理的小区。基于本方案，通过终端在确定目标SN之前，先确定第一小区的信号质量情况，并在第一小区的信号质量较好的情况下，再进一步确定目标SN，使得终端变更或添加SN之前第一小区的信号质量能够得到保证，从而确保终端在双连接模式的信号质量，提升用户体验。
结合第一方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述方法还包括：在上述第一小区的信号质量参数小于上述第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，上述终端执行以下一项或多项：上述终端确定停止条件SN的添加或变更的判断；该条件SN的添加或变更的判断包括上述终端判断至少一个候选SN是否满足上述触发条件；或者，上述终端忽视上述至少一个候选SN的辅小区组SCG配置；或者，上述终端忽视上述触发条件；或者，上述终端删除上述至少一个候选SN的SCG配置；或者，上述终端删除上述触发条件。基于本方案，通过在第一小区的信号质量较差的情况下，终端执行以下一项或多项：终端确定停止条件SN的添加或变更的判断；或者，终端忽视或删除至少一个候选SN的SCG配置；或者，终端忽视或删除触发条件，从而避免在第一小区的信号质量较差的情况下，进行条件SN的变更或条件SN的添加，造成终端在双连接模式的 信号质量不能得到保证，用户体验较差的问题。
结合第一方面或第一方面的任一可能的实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，在上述第一小区的信号质量参数小于上述第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，上述方法还包括：上述终端将满足上述触发条件的候选SN确定为目标MN，且，上述终端释放上述第一接入网设备；或者，上述终端将满足上述触发条件的候选SN确定为目标MN，且，上述终端将上述第一接入网设备切换为目标SN。基于本方案，通过在终端连接的第一小区的信号较差的情况下，可以将信号质量较好的候选SN确定为目标MN，从而确保终端连接的目标MN的信号质量较好，以提高数据的传输效率，提升用户体验。
结合第一方面或第一方面的任一可能的实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，上述方法还包括：上述终端接收来自上述第一接入网设备的第一消息，该第一消息用于指示该终端进行SN的添加或SN的变更；该第一消息包括第二目标SN的SCG配置；上述终端停止条件SN添加或条件SN变更的流程，执行SN的添加或SN的变更流程。基于本方案，在终端执行条件SN添加或条件SN变更的流程过程中，如果第一接入网设又发起了传统SN的添加或SN的变更，终端将停止条件SN添加或条件SN变更的流程，执行传统的(不带条件的)SN的添加或SN的变更流程。即传统的SN的添加或变更的优先级高于条件SN的添加或变更的优先级。
结合第一方面或第一方面的任一可能的实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，上述方法还包括：在上述终端与上述第二目标SN接入成功的情况，上述终端删除至少一个候选SN的SCG配置。基于本方案，在终端与传统SN的添加或SN的变更中的目标SN接入成功的情况下，终端可以将条件SN变更或条件SN添加流程中的至少一个候选SN的SCG配置删除。
本申请实施例的第二方面，提供一种通信方法，该方法包括：第一接入网设备确定第一信号质量参数门限值，该第一信号质量参数门限值用于终端确定第一小区的信号质量情况；该第一小区为第一接入网设备管理的小区；该第一接入网设备向终端发送第一信息，该第一信息包括上述第一信号质量参数门限值和触发条件，该触发条件为上述终端变更至目标辅节点SN或添加该目标SN的触发条件。基于本方案，通过向终端发送第一信号质量参数门限值，使得终端在确定目标SN之前，先确定第一小区的信号质量情况，并在第一小区的信号质量较好的情况下，再进一步确定目标SN，因此终端变更或添加SN之前第一小区的信号质量能够得到保证，从而确保终端在双连接模式的信号质量，提升用户体验。
结合第二方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述方法还包括：上述第一接入网设备分别向至少一个候选SN发送第一消息，该第一消息用于请求上述候选SN为上述终端分配无线资源，该第一消息包括条件SN添加或条件SN变更的指示信息；上述第一接入网设备接收来自上述候选SN的第二消息，该第二消息包括上述候选SN分配的辅小区组SCG配置。基于本方案，在条件SN的添加或变更流程中，第一接入网设备可以复用现有的消息，向候选SN发送SN添加请求消息，只是该SN添加请求消息中包括条件添加或变更的指示。可选的，上述第一消息也可以为条件SN添加请求消息。
结合第二方面或第二方面的任一可能的实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中， 上述方法还包括：上述第一接入网设备分别向第一候选SN发送第三消息，该第三消息用于指示上述第一候选SN释放该第一候选SN的SCG配置，该第一候选SN为至少一个候选SN中除上述目标SN以外的SN。基于本方案，通过向至少一个候选SN中除目标SN以外的候选SN发送第三消息，请求目标SN以外的候选SN释放其为终端分配的SCG配置，从而能够节省候选SN的无线资源。
本申请实施例的第三方面，提供一种通信方法，该方法包括：终端接收来自第一接入网设备的第一信息，该第一信息包括第一信号质量参数门限值和触发条件，该触发条件为终端变更至第一目标主辅小区PSCell或添加该第一目标PSCell的触发条件；上述终端基于该第一信息，在第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于上述第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，将满足上述触发条件的候选PSCell确定为上述第一目标PSCell；上述第一小区为第一接入网设备管理的小区。基于本方案，通过第一接入网设备向终端下发第一信号质量参数的门限值，从而使得终端在确定目标PSCell之前，先确定第一小区的信号质量情况，在终端确定其连接的第一小区的信号质量较好的情况下，再进一步确定目标PSCell，能够确保终端在双连接模式的信号质量，提升用户体验。示例性的，终端变更至第一目标PSCell时，可能是站内切换(intra-SN PSCell Change)，也可能是站间切换(inter-SN PSCell Change)。
结合第三方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：在上述第一小区的信号质量参数小于上述第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，上述终端执行以下一项或多项：上述终端确定停止条件PSCell的添加或变更的判断；该条件PSCell的添加或变更的判断包括终端判断至少一个候选PSCell是否满足上述触发条件；或者，上述终端忽视上述至少一个候选PSCell的配置；或者，上述终端忽视上述触发条件；或者，上述终端删除上述至少一个候选PSCell的配置；或者，上述终端删除上述触发条件。基于本方案，在第一小区的信号质量较差的情况下，终端执行以下一项或多项：终端确定停止条件PSCell的添加或变更的判断；或者，终端忽视或删除至少一个候选PSCell的配置；或者，终端忽视或删除触发条件，从而避免在第一小区的信号质量较差的情况下，进行条件PSCell的变更或条件PSCell的添加，造成终端在双连接模式的信号质量不能得到保证，用户体验较差的问题。
结合第三方面或第三方面的任一可能的实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，上述至少一个候选PSCell属于第二接入网设备管理的小区，该第二接入网设备为上述终端变更至上述第一目标PSCell之前，该终端在双连接通信时的辅节点SN。基于本方案，上述PSCell的变更可以为站内切换(intra-SN PSCell Change)。
结合第三方面或第三方面的任一可能的实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，在上述第一小区的信号质量参数小于上述第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，上述方法还包括：上述终端将满足上述触发条件的候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备确定为目标MN，且，上述终端释放上述第一接入网设备；或者，上述终端将满足上述触发条件的候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备确定为目标MN，且，上述终端将上述第一接入网设备切换为上述第一目标SN。基于本方案，通过在终端连接的第一小区的信号较差的情况下，可以将信号质量较好的候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备确定为目标MN，从而确保终端连接的目标MN的信号质量较好，以提高数据的传输效率，提升 用户体验。
结合第三方面或第三方面的任一可能的实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，上述方法还包括：上述终端接收来自上述第一接入网设备的第一消息，该第一消息用于指示上述终端进行PSCell的添加或PSCell的变更；该第一消息包括第二目标PSCell的配置；上述终端停止条件PSCell添加或条件PSCell变更的流程，执行PSCell的添加或PSCell的变更流程。基于本方案，在第一接入网设备发起了条件PSCell的添加或变更流程后，又发起了传统的PSCell的添加或变更流程的情况下，终端可以停止条件PSCell添加或条件PSCell变更的流程，执行PSCell的添加或PSCell的变更流程。
结合第三方面或第三方面的任一可能的实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，上述方法还包括：在上述终端与上述第二目标PSCell接入成功的情况下，上述终端删除至少一个候选PSCell的配置。基于本方案，在终端与传统的PSCell的添加或变更流程中的目标PSCell接入成功的情况下，终端删除条件PSCell的添加或变更流程中的至少一个候选PSCell的配置。
本申请实施例的第四方面，提供一种通信方法，该方法包括：第一接入网设备确定第一信号质量参数门限值，该第一信号质量参数门限值用于终端确定第一小区的信号质量情况；该第一小区为第一接入网设备管理的小区；该第一接入网设备向终端发送第一信息，该第一信息包括上述第一信号质量参数门限值和触发条件，该触发条件为终端变更至目标主辅小区PSCell或添加目标PSCell的触发条件。基于本方案，通过第一接入网设备向终端发送第一信号质量参数的门限值，从而使得终端在确定目标PSCell之前，先确定第一小区的信号质量情况，在终端确定其连接的第一小区的信号质量较好的情况下，再进一步确定目标PSCell，能够确保终端在双连接模式的信号质量，提升用户体验。
结合第四方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述方法还包括：上述第一接入网设备分别向至少一个候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备发送第一消息，该第一消息用于请求上述第二接入网设备为终端分配无线资源，该第一消息包括条件PSCell添加或条件PSCell变更的指示信息；上述第一接入网设备接收来自上述第二接入网设备的第二消息，该第二消息包括上述第二接入网设备分配的PSCell的配置。基于本方案，在条件PSCell的添加或变更流程中，第一接入网设备可以复用现有的消息。例如，第一接入网设备向候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备发送SN添加请求消息，只是该SN添加请求消息中包括条件添加或变更的指示。可选的，该第一消息也可以为条件SN添加请求消息。
结合第四方面或第四方面的任一可能的实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，上述方法还包括：上述第一接入网设备分别向至少一个第一候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备发送第三消息，该第三消息用于指示上述第二接入网设备释放上述第一候选PSCell的配置，该至少一个候选PSCell包括上述第一候选PSCell，该第一候选PSCell与上述目标PSCell为不同接入网设备管理的小区。基于本方案，通过向第一候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备发送释放请求消息，请求该第二接入网设备释放其为终端分配的PSCell的配置，从而能够节省该第二接入网设备的无线资源。
本申请实施例的第五方面，提供一种通信方法，该方法包括：终端接收来自第一 主节点MN的第一信息，该第一信息包括至少一个候选MN的标识，每个候选MN对应的至少一个候选辅节点SN的标识，该至少一个候选MN的主小区组MCG配置，该至少一个候选SN的辅小区组SCG配置，以及触发条件；该触发条件为终端切换至目标MN且变更至目标SN的触发条件，该触发条件包括第一信号质量参数门限值；上述终端确定上述目标MN以及上述目标SN，上述目标MN的信号质量参数以及上述目标SN的信号质量参数的函数的结果大于或等于上述第一信号质量参数门限值。基于本方案，通过条件MN切换和条件SN变更的条件组合，能够同时确定目标MN和目标SN。该方案与先通过触发条件确定目标MN，再确定目标SN的方法相比，能够同时确定目标MN和目标SN。
结合第五方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述触发条件还包括：上述候选MN对应的第一权重，以及上述候选SN对应的第二权重，上述终端确定上述目标MN以及上述目标SN，包括：上述终端根据每个候选MN的信号质量参数，该候选MN对应的一个候选SN的信号质量参数，以及上述第一权重和上述第二权重，确定上述候选MN和上述候选SN的信号质量参数的加权和；上述终端将该加权和大于或等于上述第一信号质量参数门限值的候选MN和候选SN，确定为上述目标MN和上述目标SN。基于本方案，可以通过候选MN和候选SN的信号质量参数的加权和，同时确定目标MN和目标SN。
本申请实施例的第六方面，提供一种通信方法，该方法包括：第一主节点MN确定触发条件，该触发条件为终端切换至目标MN且变更至目标辅节点SN的触发条件，该触发条件包括第一信号质量参数门限值；该触发条件用于上述终端根据每个候选MN和该候选MN对应的候选SN的信号质量参数的函数的结果，同时确定上述目标MN和上述目标SN；上述第一MN向终端发送第一信息，该第一信息包括至少一个候选MN的标识，每个候选MN对应的至少一个候选SN的标识，该至少一个候选MN的主小区组MCG配置，该至少一个候选SN的辅小区组SCG配置，以及上述触发条件。基于本方案，通过条件MN切换和条件SN变更的条件组合，能够同时确定目标MN和目标SN。该方案与先通过触发条件确定目标MN，再确定目标SN的方法相比，能够同时确定目标MN和目标SN。
结合第六方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述触发条件还包括候选MN对应的第一权重，以及候选SN对应的第二权重。基于本方案，可以通过候选MN和候选SN的信号质量参数的加权和，同时确定目标MN和目标SN。
结合第六方面或第六方面的任一可能的实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，上述方法还包括：上述第一MN向第一SN发送第一消息，该第一消息用于指示上述第一SN不发起条件SN变更，该第一SN为上述终端变更至上述目标SN之前，终端在双连接通信时的辅节点SN。基于本方案，通过在源MN向终端发起带条件SN变更的条件MN切换后，指示源SN不发起条件SN变更，从而能够避免不同变更情况之间可能发生碰撞的问题。
本申请实施例的第七方面，提供一种通信方法，该方法包括：终端接收来自第一主节点MN的第一信息，该第一信息包括至少一个候选MN的标识，每个候选MN对应的至少一个候选主辅小区PSCell的标识，该至少一个候选MN的主小区组MCG配 置，该至少一个候选PSCell的配置，以及触发条件；该触发条件为终端切换至目标MN且变更至目标PSCell的触发条件，该触发条件包括第一信号质量参数门限值；上述终端确定上述目标MN以及上述目标PSCell，上述目标MN的信号质量参数以及上述目标PSCell的信号质量参数的函数的结果大于或等于上述第一信号质量参数门限值。基于本方案，通过条件MN切换和条件PSCell变更的条件组合，能够同时确定目标MN和目标PSCell。该方案与先通过触发条件确定目标MN，再确定目标PSCell的方法相比，能够同时确定目标MN和目标PSCell。
结合第七方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述触发条件还包括：上述候选MN对应的第一权重，以及上述候选PSCell对应的第二权重，上述终端确定上述目标MN以及上述目标PSCell，包括：上述终端根据每个候选MN的信号质量参数，该候选MN对应的一个候选PSCell的信号质量参数，以及上述第一权重和上述第二权重，确定该候选MN和该候选PSCell的信号质量参数的加权和；上述终端将该加权和大于或等于上述第一信号质量参数门限值的候选MN和候选PSCell，确定为上述目标MN和上述目标PSCell。基于本方案，可以通过候选MN和候选PSCell的信号质量参数的加权和，同时确定目标MN和目标PSCell。
本申请实施例的第八方面，提供一种通信方法，该方法包括：第一主节点MN确定触发条件，该触发条件为终端切换至目标MN且变更至目标主辅小区PSCell的触发条件，该触发条件包括第一信号质量参数门限值；该触发条件用于所述终端根据每个候选MN和该候选MN对应的候选PSCell的信号质量参数的函数的结果，同时确定目标MN和目标PSCell；上述第一MN向终端发送第一信息，该第一信息包括至少一个候选MN的标识，每个候选MN对应的至少一个候选PSCell的标识，该至少一个候选MN的主小区组MCG配置，该至少一个候选PSCell的配置，以及上述触发条件。基于本方案，通过条件MN切换和条件PSCell变更的条件组合，能够同时确定目标MN和目标PSCell。该方案与先通过触发条件确定目标MN，再确定目标PSCell的方法相比，能够同时确定目标MN和目标PSCell。
结合第八方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述触发条件还包括候选MN对应的第一权重，以及候选PSCell对应的第二权重。基于本方案，可以通过候选MN和候选PSCell的信号质量参数的加权和，同时确定目标MN和目标PSCell。
结合第八方面或第八方面的任一可能的实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，上述方法还包括：上述第一MN向上述第一SN发送第一消息，该第一消息用于指示上述第一SN不发起条件PSCell变更，该第一SN为上述终端变更至上述目标SN之前，终端在双连接通信时的辅节点SN。基于本方案，通过在源MN向终端发起带条件SN变更的条件PSCell切换后，指示源SN不发起条件PSCell变更，从而能够避免不同变更情况之间可能发生碰撞的问题。
结合第一方面、第二方面、第三方面、第四方面、第五方面、第六方面、第七方面，以及第八方面的任一可能的实现方式，在另一种可能的实现方式中，上述信号质量参数包括：参考信号接收功率RSRP、参考信号接收质量RSRQ、接收信号强度指示RSSI，以及信号与干扰加噪声比SINR中的一种或多种。基于本方案，上述信号质量参数可以为RSRP、RSRQ、RSSI，以及SINR中的一种或多种。可以理解的是，上述 各方面中的信号质量参数可以相同，也可以不同。
本申请实施例的第九方面，提供一种计算机存储介质，所述计算机存储介质中存储有计算机程序代码，当所述计算机程序代码在处理器上运行时，使得所述处理器执行上述任一方面所述的通信方法。
本申请实施例的第十方面，提供了一种计算机程序产品，该程序产品储存有上述处理器执行的计算机软件指令，该计算机软件指令包含用于执行上述方面所述方案的程序。
本申请实施例的第十一方面，提供了一种通信装置，该装置包括处理器，还可以包括收发器以及存储器，收发器，用于收发信息，或者用于与其他网元通信；存储器，用于存储计算机执行指令；处理器，用于执行所计算机执行指令，以支持终端设备或者网络设备实现上述任一方面所述的通信方法。
本申请实施例的第十二方面，提供了一种通信装置，该装置可以以芯片的产品形态存在，该装置的结构中包括处理器，还可以包括存储器，该存储器用于与处理器耦合，保存该装置必要的程序指令和数据，该处理器用于执行存储器中存储的程序指令，以支持终端设备或者网络设备执行上述任一方面所述的方法。
本申请实施例的第十三方面，提供了一种通信装置，该装置可以以芯片的产品形态存在，该装置的结构中包括处理器和接口电路，该处理器用于通过接收电路与其它装置通信，使得该装置执行上述任一方面所述的通信方法。
本申请实施例的第十四方面，提供了一种通信系统，包括终端和第一接入网设备，所述终端用于执行上述第一方面所述的通信方法，第一接入网设备用于执行上述第二方面所述的通信方法。
本申请实施例的第十五方面，提供了一种通信系统，包括终端和第一接入网设备，所述终端用于执行上述第三方面所述的通信方法，第一接入网设备用于执行上述第四方面所述的通信方法。
本申请实施例的第十七方面，提供了一种通信系统，包括终端和第一主节点，所述终端用于执行上述第五方面所述的通信方法，第一主节点用于执行上述第六方面所述的通信方法。
本申请实施例的第十八方面，提供了一种通信系统，包括终端和第一主节点，所述终端用于执行上述第七方面所述的通信方法，第一主节点用于执行上述第八方面所述的通信方法。
附图说明
图1为本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统的结构示意图；
图2为本申请实施例提供的一种双连接网络的架构示意图；
图3为本申请实施例提供的另一种双连接网络的架构示意图；
图4为本申请实施例提供的另一种双连接网络的架构示意图；
图5为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图；
图6为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的流程示意图；
图7为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的流程示意图；
图8为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的流程示意图；
图9为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的流程示意图；
图10为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的流程示意图；
图11为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的流程示意图；
图12为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的流程示意图；
图13为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的流程示意图；
图14为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的流程示意图；
图15为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的流程示意图；
图16为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的流程示意图；
图17为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的流程示意图；
图18为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的流程示意图；
图19为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的流程示意图；
图20为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的流程示意图；
图21为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的流程示意图；
图22为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的流程示意图；
图23为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的流程示意图；
图24为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的流程示意图；
图25为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的流程示意图；
图26为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的流程示意图；
图27为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的流程示意图；
图28为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信装置的结构示意图；
图29为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的组成示意图；
图30为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信装置的组成示意图。
具体实施方式
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图，对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行描述。在本申请中，“至少一个”是指一个或者多个，“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”，描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B的情况，其中A，B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达，是指的这些项中的任意组合，包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如，a，b或c中的至少一项(个)，可以表示：a，b，c，a-b，a-c，b-c或a-b-c，其中a、b和c可以是单个，也可以是多个。
需要说明的是，本申请中，“示例性的”或者“例如”等词用于表示作例子、例证或说明。本申请中被描述为“示例性的”或者“例如”的任何实施例或设计方案不应被解释为比其他实施例或设计方案更优选或更具优势。确切而言，使用“示例性的”或者“例如”等词旨在以具体方式呈现相关概念。
本申请实施例定义接入网到终端的单向通信链路为下行链路，在下行链路上传输的数据为下行数据，下行数据的传输方向称为下行方向；而终端到接入网的单向通信链路为上行链路，在上行链路上传输的数据为上行数据，上行数据的传输方向称为上行方向。
本申请实施例中所述的资源也可以称为传输资源，包括时域资源、频域资源、码道资源中的一种或多种，可以用于在上行通信过程或者下行通信过程中承载数据或信令。
应理解，在本发明实施例中，“与A对应的B”表示B与A相关联，根据A可以确定B。但还应理解，根据A确定B并不意味着仅仅根据A确定B，还可以根据A和/或其它信息确定B。
本申请实施例中出现的“多个”是指两个或两个以上。
本申请实施例中出现的第一、第二等描述，仅作示意与区分描述对象之用，没有次序之分，也不表示本申请实施例中对设备个数的特别限定，不能构成对本申请实施例的任何限制。
本申请实施例中出现的“连接”是指直接连接或者间接连接等各种连接方式，以实现设备间的通信，本申请实施例对此不做任何限定。
本申请实施例中出现的“传输”(transmit/transmission)如无特别说明，是指双向传输，包含发送和/或接收的动作。具体地，本申请实施例中的“传输”包含数据的发送，数据的接收，或者数据的发送和数据的接收。或者说，这里的数据传输包括上行和/或下行数据传输。数据可以包括信道和/或信号，上行数据传输即上行信道和/或上行信号传输，下行数据传输即下行信道和/或下行信号传输。
本申请实施例中出现的“网络”与“系统”表达的是同一概念，通信系统即为通信网络。
可以理解的，本申请实施例中，终端和/或基站可以执行本申请实施例中的部分或全部步骤，这些步骤或操作仅是示例，本申请实施例中，还可以执行其它操作或者各种操作的变形。此外，各个步骤可以按照本申请实施例呈现的不同的顺序来执行，并且有可能并非要执行本申请实施例中的全部操作。
本申请实施例提供的通信方法可以应用于图1所示的通信系统。如图1所示，终端支持双连接(Dual Connectivity，DC)，主节点(Master Node，MN)和辅节点(secondary node，SN)共同为终端提供数据传输服务。MN与核心网(Core Network，CN)之间通过S1/NG接口连接。MN与核心网之间至少包括控制面连接，还可以有用户面连接，该S1接口包括S1-U/NG-U和S1-C/NG-C。其中，S1-U/NG-U代表用户面连接，S1-C/NG-C代表控制面连接。SN与核心网之间可以具有用户面连接，也可以不具有用户面连接。当SN与核心网之间不具有用户面连接时，终端的数据可以由MN在分组数据汇聚协议(packet data convergence protocol，PDCP)层分流给SN。该MN又可被称为主基站或主接入网设备，SN又可被称为辅基站或辅接入网设备。
本申请中的通信系统可以是长期演进(long term evolution，LTE)无线通信系统，或者是新无线(new radio，NR)系统等第五代(5th generation，5G)移动通信系统、还可以是其他下一代(next generation，NG)通信系统等，本申请实施例对此不做限定。
示例性的，上述MN和SN可以为LTE第三代合作伙伴计划(3rd generation partnership project，3GPP)所定义的基站。例如，可以是LTE系统中的基站设备，即演进型节点B(evolved NodeB，eNB/eNodeB)；还可以是NR系统中的接入网侧设备， 包括gNB、传输点(trasmission/reception point，TRP)等。
示例性的，上述MN和SN可以是由集中式单元(Centralized Unit，CU)和分布式单元(Distributed Unit，DU)组成的，采用CU-DU的结构可以将基站的协议层拆分开，部分协议层的功能放在CU集中控制，剩下部分或全部协议层的功能分布在DU中，由CU集中控制DU，从而能够节省成本，易于网络扩展。示例性的，MN和SN可以包括一个或多个CU，以及一个或多个DU。本申请实施例对于上述MN和SN的具体架构并不进行限定。
示例性的，双连接可以在不同制式的接入网设备之间实现，如图2所示，为LTE-NR双连接(E-UTRA-NR Dual Connectivity，EN-DC)网络的示意图。EN-DC网络是4G无线接入网与5G NR的双连接，LTE基站(LTE eNB)作为MN，NR基站(NR gNB)作为SN。如图2中的(a)所示，LTE eNB与LTE系统的演进型分组核心网(evolved Packet Core，EPC)之间存在S1接口，至少有控制面连接，可以还有用户面连接。如图2中的(b)所示，NR gNB和EPC之间存在S1-U接口，即只可以有用户面连接。
如图3所示，为NR-LTE双连接(NR-E-UTRA Dual Connectivity，NE-DC)网络的示意图。NE-DC网络是5G核心网下的4G无线接入网与5G NR的双连接，NR基站(gNB)作为MN，LTE基站(ng-eNB)作为SN，且MN和SN都连接5G核心网(5th Generation Core Network，5GC)。如图3中的(a)所示，gNB与5GC之间存在NG接口，可以为终端建立控制面连接和用户面连接，ng-eNB通过gNB向5GC发送用户面数据。如图3中的(b)所示，ng-eNB与5GC之间存在NG-U接口，仅为终端建立用户面连接，ng-eNB直接向5GC发送用户面数据。
如图4所示，为5G核心网LTE-NR双连接(Next Generation E-UTRA-NR Dual Connectivity，NGEN-DC)网络的示意图。NGEN-DC网络是5G核心网下的4G无线接入网与5G NR的双连接，LTE基站(ng-eNB)作为MN，NR基站(gNB)作为SN，且MN和SN都连接5GC。如图4中的(a)所示，ng-eNB与5GC之间存在NG接口，可以为终端建立控制面连接和用户面连接，gNB通过ng-eNB向5GC发送用户面数据。如图4中的(b)所示，gNB与5GC之间存在NG-U接口，仅为终端建立用户面连接，gNB直接向5GC发送用户面数据。
在图2至图4的双连接网络中，SN和核心网之间也可以不建立用户面连接，而是经由MN传递数据，例如，在下行方向上，终端的数据先到达MN，MN在PDCP层将终端的数据分流给SN，其中分流的数据的形式例如为PDCP协议数据单元(Protocol Data Unit，PDU)。
可以理解的，本申请实施例提供的通信方法可以适应于传统LTE的双连接，也可以适用于5G系统的EN-DC网络、NE-DC网络，或NGEN-DC网络，还可以适应于5G核心网NR-NR双连接(NR-NR Dual Connectivity，NR-DC)以及未来的其他DC架构，本申请实施例对于该通信方法适应的双连接网络的具体架构并不进行限定，在此仅是以图2-图4进行示例性说明。下述实施例中以EN-DC网络架构为例，对本申请实施例提供的通信方法进行说明。
在双连接中，终端与接入网侧建立的数据无线承载(Data Radio Bearer，DRB)可以由MN或者SN独立提供，也可由MN和SN同时提供。由MN提供的承载称为主 小区组(Master Cell Group，MCG)承载，其中，MCG包含用于为终端提供空口资源的至少一个MN管理的小区；由SN提供的承载称为辅小区组(Secondary Cell Group，SCG)承载，其中，SCG包含用于为终端提供空口资源的至少一个SN管理的小区。此外，同时由MN和SN提供空口资源的承载称为分离承载(split Bearer)。
当MCG中仅有一个小区时，该小区为终端的主小区(Primary cell，PCell)。当SCG中仅一个小区时，该小区为终端的主辅小区(Primary Secondary Cell，PSCell)。PCell和PSCell可以统称为特别小区(Special Cell，SpCell)。当MCG或SCG中各有多个小区时，除了SpCell的小区都可以称为辅小区(Secondary Cell，SCell)。此时各个小区组中的SCell与SpCell进行载波聚合(carrier aggregation，CA)，共同为终端提供传输资源。其中，PSCell属于SCG的小区中，UE被指示进行随机接入或者初始PUSCH传输的小区。SCell是工作在辅载波上的小区，一旦无线资源控制(Radio Resource Control，RRC)连接建立，SCell就可能被配置以提供额外的无线资源。
在终端进行载波聚合或双连接通信的场景中，MN或SN发起条件PSCell的添加，条件PSCell的变更，条件SN的添加，或条件SN的变更中的任一流程时，由于源MN发给终端的触发条件的时间与终端判断候选SN是否满足触发条件的时间存在时间差，因此可能导致终端将信号质量较好的候选SN确定为目标SN时，其连接的PCell的质量不能得到保证，从而造成终端在双连接模式的信号质量不能得到保证，用户体验较差。
为了解决现有技术中将条件切换机制与DC场景相结合时，可能造成终端在双连接模式的信号质量不能得到保证，用户体验较差的问题。本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法，能够确保终端在双连接模式的信号质量，提升用户体验。
在具体实现时，本申请实施提供的通信方法中，图1所示的MN、SN、终端均可以采用图5所示的组成结构，或者包括图5所示的部件。
示例性的，图5为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置500的组成示意图。如图5所示，该通信装置500可以包括至少一个处理器501，存储器502、收发器503以及通信总线504。
下面结合图5对该通信装置500的各个构成部件进行具体的介绍：
处理器501是通信装置500的控制中心，可以是一个处理器，也可以是多个处理元件的统称。例如，处理器501是一个中央处理器(central processing unit，CPU)，也可以是特定集成电路(Application Specific Integrated Circuit，ASIC)，或者是被配置成实施本发明实施例的一个或多个集成电路，例如：一个或多个微处理器(digital signal processor，DSP)，或，一个或者多个现场可编程门阵列(Field Programmable Gate Array，FPGA)。
其中，处理器501可以通过运行或执行存储在存储器502内的软件程序，以及调用存储在存储器502内的数据，执行通信装置的各种功能。
在具体的实现中，作为一种实施例，处理器501可以包括一个或多个CPU，例如图5中所示的CPU0和CPU1。
在具体实现中，作为一种实施例，通信装置500可以包括多个处理器，例如图5中所示的处理器501和处理器505。这些处理器中的每一个可以是一个单核处理器 (single-CPU)，也可以是一个多核处理器(multi-CPU)。这里的处理器可以指一个或多个通信设备、电路、和/或用于处理数据(例如计算机程序指令)的处理核。
存储器502可以是只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)或可存储静态信息和指令的其他类型的静态存储通信设备，随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)或者可存储信息和指令的其他类型的动态存储通信设备，也可以是电可擦可编程只读存储器(Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory，EEPROM)、只读光盘(Compact Disc Read-Only Memory，CD-ROM)或其他光盘存储、光碟存储(包括压缩光碟、激光碟、光碟、数字通用光碟、蓝光光碟等)、磁盘存储介质或者其他磁存储通信设备、或者能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质，但不限于此。存储器502可以是独立存在，通过通信总线504与处理器501相连接。存储器502也可以和处理器501集成在一起。
其中，所述存储器502用于存储执行本发明方案的软件程序，并由处理器501来控制执行。
收发器503，用于与接入点之间的通信。当然，收发器503还可以用于与通信网络通信，通信网络例如为以太网，无线接入网(radio access network，RAN)，无线局域网(Wireless Local Area Networks，WLAN)等。收发器503可以包括接收单元实现接收功能，以及发送单元实现发送功能。
通信总线504，可以是工业标准体系结构(Industry Standard Architecture，ISA)总线、外部通信设备互连(Peripheral Component，PCI)总线或扩展工业标准体系结构(Extended Industry Standard Architecture，EISA)总线等。该总线可以分为地址总线、数据总线、控制总线等。为便于表示，图5中仅用一条粗线表示，但并不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。
需要说明的是，通信装置500可以是台式机、便携式电脑、网络服务器、移动手机、平板电脑、无线终端、嵌入式设备、芯片系统或有图5中类似结构的设备。此外，图5中示出的组成结构并不构成对该通信装置的限定，除图5所示部件之外，该通信装置可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件，或者组合某些部件，或者不同的部件布置。
结合图1-图5，如图6所示，为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法，该通信方法包括步骤S600-S603。
S600、第一接入网设备确定第一信号质量参数门限值。
示例性的，该第一信号质量参数门限值用于终端确定第一小区的信号质量情况，该第一小区为第一接入网设备管理的小区。该信号质量参数包括：参考信号接收功率(Reference Signal Receiving Power，RSRP)、参考信号接收质量(Reference Signal Receiving Quality，RSRQ)、接收信号强度指示(Received Signal Strength Indicator，RSSI)，以及信号与干扰加噪声比(Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio，SINR)中的一种或多种。本申请实施例对于信号质量参数的具体参数并不进行限定，在此仅是示例性说明。
示例性的，在信号质量参数为上述多个参数的情况下，上述第一信号质量参数门限值可以包括每个信号质量参数对应的门限值。例如，信号质量参数包括RSRP和 RSRQ时，第一信号质量参数门限值可以包括RSRP对应的一个门限值和RSRQ对应的一个门限值。
示例性的，第一接入网设备确定第一信号质量参数门限值，可以包括：第一接入网设备自己确定第一信号质量参数门限值。在第一接入网设备为终端在双连接通信时的MN的情况下，上述第一接入网设备确定第一信号质量参数门限值，还可以包括：第一接入网设备接收SN确定的第一信号质量参数门限值，或者，第一接入网设备可以和SN共同协商确定第一信号质量参数门限值。本申请实施例对于第一接入网设备确定第一信号质量参数门限值的具体实现方式并不进行限定，在此仅是示例性说明。
示例性的，第一接入网设备可以根据终端的质量需求、第一接入网设备的负载情况等参数确定第一信号质量参数门限值。本申请实施例对于第一信号质量参数门限值的确定方法并不进行限定，在此仅是示例性说明。
S601、第一接入网设备向终端发送第一信息。
该第一信息包括第一信号质量参数门限值和触发条件，该触发条件为终端变更至第一目标SN或添加第一目标SN的触发条件。可选的，该第一信息还可以包括至少一个候选SN的SCG配置，该至少一个候选SN包括第一目标SN。
示例性的，触发条件可以包括执行事件类型和相应的门限值。例如，执行事件类型可以包括A3事件、A4事件、A5事件、B1事件、B2事件或其他执行事件类型等。例如，A3事件：表示邻区质量高于服务小区质量，用于同频、异频的基于覆盖的切换；A4事件：表示邻区质量高于一定门限，用于基于负荷的切换，可用于负载均衡；A5事件：表示服务小区质量低于一定门限并且邻区质量高于一定门限，可用于负载均衡；异系统测量事件：B1事件：邻小区质量高于一定门限，用于测量高优先级的异系统小区；B2事件：服务小区质量低于一定门限，并且邻小区质量高于一定门限，用于相同或较低优先级的异系统小区的测量。
示例性的，上述触发条件可以包括一个或多个执行事件类型，以及每个执行事件类型相对应的门限值。本申请实施例对于触发条件包括的具体事件类型并不进行限定，在此仅是示例性说明。
示例性的，上述触发条件为终端添加第一目标SN的触发条件时，该终端在添加第一目标SN之前，可以仅通过第一接入网设备传输数据。该终端通过第一接入网设备传输数据时，可以进行载波聚合，即终端可以同时使用第一接入网设备管理的多个小区(其中一个是主小区PCell，其它是辅小区SCell)进行上下行通信，从而提高数据传输速率。上述第一小区为终端工作在单连接模式下进行载波聚合的PCell。可选的，该第一小区也可以为终端工作在单连接单小区模式下的服务小区。
示例性的，上述触发条件为终端变更至第一目标SN的触发条件时，该终端在变更至第一目标SN之前，可以通过源SN和第一接入网设备传输数据。即该终端在变更至第一目标SN之前，工作在双连接模式，该第一接入网设备为终端在双连接通信时的主节点MN。上述第一小区为终端工作在双连接模式下，由MN管理的PCell。
示例性的，上述第一信息可以携带在一个消息中，也可以携带在多个消息中。例如，第一信息可以携带在RRC重配置消息(例如，RRC Connection Reconfiguration或RRC Reconfiguration)中。再例如，第一信息中的触发条件可以携带在RRC重配置消 息中，第一信息中的第一信号质量参数门限值可以携带在系统消息中。可选的，该第一信息还包括至少一个候选SN的SCG配置时，该至少一个候选SN的SCG配置也可以携带在RRC重配置消息中。本申请实施例对于第一信息的具体携带方法并不进行限定，在此仅是示例性说明。
示例性的，上述第一信息包括的第一信号质量参数门限值、触发条件，以及至少一个候选SN中的一个或多个，可以是由MN决定，也可以是由SN决定，还可以是由MN和SN协商决定，本申请实施例对此并不进行限定。
S602、终端接收第一信息。
示例性的，在第一信息携带在RRC重配置消息的情况下，终端接收RRC重配置消息，获取第一信息。在第一信息携带在RRC重配置消息和系统消息的情况下，终端接收RRC重配置消息，获取触发条件，终端接收系统消息，获取第一信号质量参数门限值。
S603、终端基于第一信息，在第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，将满足触发条件的候选SN确定为第一目标SN。
第一小区为第一接入网设备管理的小区。
示例性的，在信号质量参数包括多个参数的情况下，第一信号质量参数门限值可以为多个，上述第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于第一信号质量参数门限值可以包括：第一小区的至少一个信号质量参数大于或等于每个信号质量参数对应的门限值。例如，信号质量参数包括RSRP和RSRQ时，第一信号质量参数门限值可以包括RSRP对应的一个门限值(记为门限值1)和RSRQ对应的一个门限值(记为门限值2)，上述第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于第一信号质量参数门限值可以包括：第一小区的RSRP大于或等于门限值1，和/或，第一小区的RSRQ大于或等于门限值2。
示例性的，在终端应用候选SN的SCG配置成功时，终端可以基于第一信息中的第一信号质量参数门限值确定其连接的第一小区的信号质量，在第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端确定第一小区的信号质量较好。再进一步将至少一个候选SN中满足触发条件的候选SN确定为第一目标SN。从而避免第一接入网设备下发触发条件的时间与终端确定满足触发条件的目标SN的时间存在时间差时，由于第一小区信号质量下降过多导致终端的双连接体验下降的问题。
示例性的，在第一小区为终端工作在单连接单小区模式下的服务小区，或，终端工作在单连接模式下进行载波聚合的主小区的情况下，终端先判断该第一小区的信号质量情况，在该第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端进一步将满足触发条件的候选SN确定为第一目标SN。可选的，终端可以向其确定的第一目标SN发起随机接入，终端与该第一目标SN接入成功时，该终端工作在双连接模式下。其中，第一接入网设备为终端工作在双连接模式时的MN，第一目标SN为终端工作在双连接模式时的SN。
示例性的，在上述第一小区为终端工作在双连接模式下，由MN管理的主小区的情况下，终端可以先判断该第一小区的信号质量情况，在该第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端进一步将满足触发条件的候选SN确定为第一目标SN。可选的，终端可以向其确定的第一目标SN发起随机接入，终端 与该第一目标SN接入成功时，该终端可以同时通过第一接入网设备和第一目标SN传输数据。其中，第一接入网设备为终端工作在双连接模式时的MN，第一目标SN为终端工作在双连接模式时的SN。
本实施例通过第一接入网设备向终端下发第一信号质量参数的门限值，从而使得终端在确定目标SN之前，先确定第一小区的信号质量情况，在终端确定其连接的第一小区的信号质量较好的情况下，再进一步确定目标SN，能够确保终端在双连接模式的信号质量，提升用户体验。
本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，通过第一接入网设备向终端发送第一信息；终端接收第一信息；终端基于第一信息，在第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，将满足触发条件的候选SN确定为第一目标SN。本实施例通过终端在确定目标SN之前，先确定第一小区的信号质量情况，并在第一小区的信号质量较好的情况下，再进一步确定目标SN，使得终端变更或添加SN之前第一小区的信号质量能够得到保证，从而确保终端在双连接模式的信号质量，提升用户体验。
可选的，本申请实施例还提供一种通信方法，如图7所示，在终端和上述第一目标SN接入成功的情况下，在上述步骤S600-S603之后，还可以包括步骤S604。
S604、第一接入网设备向第一候选SN发送第一消息，该第一消息用于指示第一候选SN释放第一候选SN的SCG配置。
该第一候选SN为至少一个候选SN中除第一目标SN以外的SN。
示例性的，以至少一个候选SN包括T-SN1、T-SN2和T-SN3为例。若步骤S603中确定的第一目标SN为T-SN1，那么在终端和该T-SN1接入成功的情况下，第一接入网设备分别向其他候选SN(T-SN2和T-SN3)发送第一消息，指示T-SN2释放T-SN2的SCG配置，T-SN3释放T-SN3的SCG配置。
可选的，上述第一消息可以为释放请求消息。
本实施例通过向至少一个候选SN中除目标SN以外的候选SN发送释放请求消息，请求目标SN以外的候选SN释放其为终端分配的SCG配置，从而能够节省候选SN的无线资源。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信方法，如图8所示，在终端确定第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，在上述步骤S600-S602之后还可以包括步骤S605。
S605、在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端执行以下一项或多项：终端确定停止条件SN的添加或变更的判断；或者，终端忽视至少一个候选SN的SCG配置；或者，终端忽视触发条件；或者，终端删除至少一个候选SN的SCG配置；或者，终端删除触发条件。
上述终端停止条件SN的添加或变更的判断包括：终端停止判断至少一个候选SN是否满足触发条件。
第一种实现方式中，在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端确定其当前连接的第一小区的信号质量较差，终端可以停止判断至少一个候选SN是否满足上述触发条件。可选的，终端停止判断至少一个候选SN是否满足上述触发条件可以包括：终端停止预设时长后，确定第一小区的信号质量情况，如果 第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于第一信号质量参数门限值，继续判断至少一个候选SN是否满足上述触发条件；如果第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值，终端再停止预设时长。或者，终端停止判断至少一个候选SN是否满足上述触发条件，并持续检测第一小区的信号质量，在第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端继续判断至少一个候选SN是否满足上述触发条件。
第二种实现方式中，在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端忽视或删除至少一个候选SN的SCG配置。终端忽视至少一个候选SN的SCG配置包括终端维持当前配置，即终端不执行条件SN添加或变更流程。
第三种实现方式中，在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端忽视或删除触发条件。
本实施例在第一小区的信号质量较差的情况下，终端执行以下一项或多项：终端确定停止条件SN的添加或变更的判断；或者，终端忽视或删除至少一个候选SN的SCG配置；或者，终端忽视或删除触发条件。从而避免在第一小区的信号质量较差的情况下，进行条件SN的变更或条件SN的添加，造成终端在双连接模式的信号质量不能得到保证，用户体验较差的问题。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信方法，如图9所示，在终端确定第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，在上述步骤S600-S602之后还可以包括步骤S606。
S606、在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端将满足触发条件的候选SN确定为目标MN，且，终端释放第一接入网设备；或者，终端将满足触发条件的候选SN确定为目标MN，且，终端将第一接入网设备切换为第一目标SN。
第一种实现方式中，在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端可以将满足触发条件的信号质量较好的候选SN确定为第一目标MN，并释放信号质量较差的MN(第一接入网设备)。从而确保终端连接的MN的信号质量较好。
例如，终端在变更SN之前，终端通过MN和源SN同时传输数据，在发起条件SN变更流程后，在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端可以将触发条件的信号质量较好的候选T-SN1确定为目标MN，并释放MN。即终端可以通过目标MN和源SN同时传输数据。
第二种实现方式中，在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端可以将满足触发条件的信号质量较好的候选SN确定为目标MN，将信号质量较差的MN(第一接入网设备)切换为第一目标SN。
例如，终端在变更SN之前，终端通过MN和源SN同时传输数据，在发起条件SN变更流程后，在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端可以将触发条件的信号质量较好的候选T-SN1确定为目标MN，并将MN切换为第一目标SN。即终端可以通过目标MN和第一目标SN同时传输数据。
本实施例通过在终端连接的第一小区的信号较差的情况下，可以将信号质量较好 的候选SN确定为目标MN，从而确保终端连接的目标MN的信号质量较好，以提高数据的传输效率，提升用户体验。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信方法，如图10所示，在上述步骤S600之前还可以包括步骤S607-S610。
S607、第一接入网设备分别向至少一个候选SN发送第二消息，第二消息用于请求候选SN为终端分配无线资源。
该第二消息包括条件SN添加或条件SN变更的指示信息。
示例性的，该第二消息可以为条件SN添加请求消息(Conditional SN Addition Request)或SN添加请求消息(SN Addition Request)。该SN添加请求消息中携带SN添加或SN变更的指示信息。
示例性的，以至少一个候选SN包括T-SN1、T-SN2和T-SN3为例。第一接入网设备可以分别向T-SN1、T-SN2和T-SN3发送第二消息，请求T-SN1、T-SN2和T-SN3为终端分配无线资源。
可选的，在候选SN下管理多个候选小区的情况下，第一接入网设备可以向该候选SN发送第二消息，该第二消息中携带第一列表，该第一列表包括多个候选小区的标识，该第二消息用于指示该候选SN为终端分配每个候选小区对应的无线资源；或者，在候选SN下管理多个候选小区的情况下，第一接入网设备可以向该候选SN分别发送多个第二消息，每个第二消息用于指示该候选SN为终端分配一个候选小区对应的无线资源。
S608、候选SN接收第二消息。
示例性的，候选SN可以接收条件SN添加请求消息或SN添加请求消息。
S609、候选SN向第一接入网设备发送第三消息，第三消息包括候选SN分配的SCG配置。
该第三消息可以为条件SN添加请求确认消息(Conditional SN Addition Request Acknowledge)或SN添加请求确认消息(SN Addition Request Acknowledge)。该SN添加请求确认消息中携带SN添加或SN变更的指示信息。
示例性的，以至少一个候选SN包括T-SN1、T-SN2和T-SN3为例。如果T-SN1、T-SN2和T-SN3可以接受第一接入网设备发送的资源请求，T-SN1可以向第一接入网设备发送第三消息，该第三消息包括T-SN1分配的SCG配置；T-SN2可以向第一接入网设备发送第三消息，该第三消息包括T-SN2分配的SCG配置；T-SN3可以向第一接入网设备发送第三消息，该第三消息包括T-SN3分配的SCG配置。
可选的，上述候选SN分配的SCG配置可以全量配置或增量配置。上述第三消息还可以包括全量RRC配置(full RRC configuration)或者增量RRC配置(delta RRC configuration)的指示。可选的，如果第三消息包括增量RRC配置的指示，那么在上述步骤S607之前，第一接入网设备可以向源SN请求当前的SCG配置。
S610、第一接入网设备接收第三消息。
示例性的，第一接入网设备可以接收候选SN发送的条件SN添加请求确认消息或SN添加请求确认消息。
本实施例可以通过第一接入网设备向至少一个候选SN发送SN添加请求消息，用 于请求候选SN为终端分配SCG资源，在候选SN接收第一接入网设备发送的资源请求的情况下，候选SN向第一接入网设备发送携带SCG配置的SN添加请求确认消息，从而第一接入网设备才可以向终端发送RRC重配置信息，指示终端进行SN的变更或添加。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信方法，如图11所示，在上述步骤S601之后还可以包括步骤S611-S614。
S611、第一接入网设备向终端发送第四消息，第四消息用于指示终端进行SN的添加或SN的变更。
第四消息包括第二目标SN的SCG配置。该第四消息可以为RRC重配置消息。
示例性的，第一接入网设备向终端发送的第四消息，指示终端进行SN的变更或SN的添加。与步骤S601中发送的RRC重配置消息不同的是，步骤S611指示终端进行传统的不带条件判断的SN添加或变更，即指示终端添加或变更至该第二目标SN。而步骤S601中指示终端进行的是带条件判断的SN条件或变更，即需要在至少一个候选SN中，将满足触发条件的候选SN确定为第一目标SN，再添加或变更至该第一目标SN。也就是第一接入网设备发起了条件SN的添加或变更流程(步骤S601)后，又发起了传统的SN的添加或变更流程(步骤S611)。
S612、终端接收第四消息。
S613、终端停止条件SN添加或条件SN变更的流程，执行SN的添加或SN的变更流程。
示例性的，上述条件SN添加或条件SN变更的流程可以包括：终端比较第一小区的信号质量参数与第一信号质量参数门限值的大小，或者，终端确定候选SN是否满足触发条件。
例如，终端在接收来自第一接入网设备的第四消息时，如果终端正在比较第一小区的信号质量参数与第一信号质量参数门限值的大小，终端将停止比较第一小区的信号质量参数与第一信号质量参数门限值的大小，添加第二目标SN或变更至第二目标SN。再例如，终端在接收来自第一接入网设备的第四消息时，如果终端正在确定候选SN是否满足触发条件，终端将停止确定候选SN是否满足触发条件，添加第二目标SN或变更至第二目标SN。
示例性的，在第一接入网设备发起了条件SN的添加或变更流程后，又发起了传统的SN的添加或变更流程的情况下，终端可以停止条件SN添加或条件SN变更的流程，执行SN的添加或SN的变更流程。即传统的SN的添加或变更的优先级高于条件SN的添加或变更的优先级。在终端执行条件SN添加或条件SN变更的流程过程中，如果又接收到了传统SN的添加或SN的变更的指示，终端将停止条件SN添加或条件SN变更的流程，执行SN的添加或SN的变更流程。
可选的，如果终端执行SN的添加或SN的变更流程后，终端和第二目标SN接入失败，那么终端可以继续执行条件SN添加或条件SN变更的流程。
(可选的)S614、在终端和第二目标SN接入成功的情况下，终端删除至少一个候选SN的SCG配置。
示例性的，在终端和第二目标SN接入成功的情况下，终端可以将条件SN添加或 变更流程中至少一个候选SN为终端分配的SCG配置删除。
可选的，在终端和第二目标SN接入成功的情况下，终端还可以将条件SN添加或变更流程中的触发条件删除。
本实施例在第一接入网设备发起了条件SN的添加或变更流程后，又发起了传统的SN的添加或变更流程的情况下，终端可以停止条件SN添加或条件SN变更的流程，执行SN的添加或SN的变更流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信方法，如图12所示，应用在条件SN添加的流程中，该方法可以包括步骤S1201-S1213。
S1201、第一接入网设备向候选SN发送SN添加请求消息。
该SN添加请求消息中携带条件添加的指示。
该候选SN可以为一个或多个，本申请实施例对此并不进行限定。在候选SN为多个的情况下，第一接入网设备向多个候选SN分别发送SN添加请求消息，指示候选SN为终端分配无线资源。
可选的，上述步骤S1201中第一接入网设备也可以向候选SN发送条件SN添加请求消息(Conditional SN Addition Request)。
如图12所示，图12中的候选SN包括第一目标SN和第一候选SN。
S1202、候选SN接收SN添加请求消息。
S1203、候选SN向第一接入网设备发送SN添加请求确认消息。
示例性的，该SN添加请求确认消息中携带条件添加的指示。
示例性的，在候选SN接受第一接入网设备发送的资源请求的情况下，候选SN向第一接入网设备发送SN添加请求确认消息，该SN添加请求确认消息中携带该候选SN为终端分配的SCG配置。
可选的，上述步骤S1203中候选SN也可以向第一接入网设备发送条件SN添加请求确认消息(Conditional SN Addition Request Acknowledge)。
S1204、第一接入网设备接收SN添加请求确认消息。
可以理解的，步骤S1201-S1204的具体实现方式可以和步骤S607-S610相同，在此不再赘述。
S1205、第一接入网设备向终端发送第一信息，第一信息包括第一信号质量参数门限值和触发条件，该触发条件为终端添加第一目标SN的触发条件。
S1206、终端接收第一信息。
示例性的，基于第一信息，可以将第一小区的信号质量参数与第一信号质量参数门限值的大小分为两种情况。在第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端可以执行步骤S1207-S1211；在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端执行步骤S1212或步骤S1213。如图12所示，在第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端执行步骤S1207-S1211为图12中的情况一；在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端执行步骤S1212为图12中的情况二；在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端执行步骤S1213为图12中的情况三。上述情况一、情况二和情况三为并列的三种情况。
S1207、终端基于第一信息，在第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，将满足触发条件的候选SN确定为第一目标SN。
可以理解的，步骤S1205-S1207的具体实现方式可以和步骤S601-S603相同，在此不再赘述。
S1208、终端向第一接入网设备发送RRC重配置完成消息。
示例性的，终端应用第一目标SN的SCG配置，并向第一接入网设备发送RRC重配置完成消息，该RRC重配置完成消息中携带第一目标SN添加成功的指示。
S1209、第一接入网设备向第一目标SN发送SN重配置完成消息。
该SN重配置完成消息中携带条件重配的指示。
可选的，步骤S1209中第一接入网设备也可以向第一目标SN发送条件SN重配置完成消息，以告知第一目标SN，终端已完成条件SN的添加流程。
S1210、终端向第一目标SN发起随机接入。
示例性的，本申请实施例对于上述步骤S1208和步骤S1210的执行顺序并不进行限定，图12仅以先执行S1208，再执行S1210为例进行示意。
S1211、在终端和第一目标SN接入成功的情况下，第一接入网设备分别向第一候选SN发送第一消息，该第一消息用于指示第一候选SN释放第一候选SN的SCG配置。
可以理解的，步骤S1211的具体实现方式可以和步骤S604相同，在此不再赘述。
S1212、在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端执行以下一项或多项：终端确定停止条件SN的添加或变更的判断；或者，终端忽视或删除至少一个候选SN的SCG配置；或者，终端忽视或删除触发条件。
S1213、在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端将满足触发条件的候选SN确定为目标MN，且，终端释放第一接入网设备；或者，终端将满足触发条件的候选SN确定为目标MN，且，终端将第一接入网设备切换为第一目标SN。
可以理解的，步骤S1212-S1213的具体实现方式可以和步骤S605-S606相同，在此不再赘述。
本申请实施例在条件SN添加流程中，通过第一接入网设备向终端发送第一信号质量参数门限值，从而使得终端在确定目标SN之前，先确定其连接的第一小区的信号质量情况，并在第一小区的信号质量较好的情况下，再进一步确定目标SN，使得终端添加SN之前第一小区的信号质量能够得到保证，从而确保终端在双连接模式的信号质量，提升用户体验。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信方法，如图13所示，应用在MN发起的条件SN变更的流程中，该方法可以包括步骤S1301-S1317。
S1301、MN向候选SN发送SN添加请求消息。
该MN为步骤S601中的第一接入网设备。该SN添加请求消息中携带条件变更的指示或条件指示。
上述候选SN可以为一个或多个，本申请实施例对此并不进行限定。在候选SN为多个的情况下，MN向多个候选SN分别发送SN添加请求消息，指示候选SN为终端 分配无线资源。
可选的，上述步骤S1301中MN也可以向候选SN发送条件SN添加请求消息(Conditional SN Addition Request)。
如图13所示，图13中的候选SN包括第一目标SN和第一候选SN。
S1302、候选SN接收SN添加请求消息。
S1303、候选SN向MN发送SN添加请求确认消息。
示例性的，该SN添加请求确认消息中携带条件变更的指示或条件指示。
示例性的，在候选SN接受MN发送的资源请求的情况下，候选SN向MN发送SN添加请求确认消息，该SN添加请求确认消息中携带该候选SN为终端分配的SCG配置。
可选的，上述步骤S1303中候选SN也可以向MN发送条件SN添加请求确认消息(Conditional SN Addition Request Acknowledge)。
S1304、MN接收SN添加请求确认消息。
可以理解的，步骤S1301-S1304的具体实现方式可以和步骤S607-S610相同，在此不再赘述。
S1305、MN向源SN发送SN释放请求消息。
该SN释放请求消息用于指示源SN释放其资源。
S1306、源SN接收SN释放请求消息。
示例性的，源SN接收SN释放请求消息后，不再向终端发送数据。
S1307、源SN向MN发送SN释放请求确认消息。
S1308、MN接收SN释放请求确认消息。
S1309、MN向终端发送第一信息，第一信息包括第一信号质量参数门限值和触发条件，该触发条件为终端变更至第一目标SN的触发条件。
S1310、终端接收第一信息。
示例性的，基于第一信息，可以将第一小区的信号质量参数与第一信号质量参数门限值的大小分为两种情况。在第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端可以执行步骤S1311-S1315；在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端执行步骤S1316或S1317。如图13所示，在第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端执行步骤S1311-S1315为图13中的情况一；在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端执行步骤S1316为图13中的情况二；在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端执行步骤S1317为图13中的情况三。上述情况一、情况二和情况三为并列的三种情况。
S1311、终端基于第一信息，在第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，将满足触发条件的候选SN确定为第一目标SN。
可以理解的，步骤S1309-S1311的具体实现方式可以和步骤S601-S603相同，在此不再赘述。
S1312、终端向MN发送RRC重配置完成消息。
示例性的，终端应用第一目标SN的SCG配置，并向MN发送RRC重配置完成消息，该RRC重配置完成消息中携带第一目标SN变更成功的指示。
S1313、MN向第一目标SN发送SN重配置完成消息。
该SN重配置完成消息中携带条件重配的指示。
可选的，步骤S1313中MN也可以向第一目标SN发送条件SN重配置完成消息，以告知第一目标SN，终端已完成条件SN的变更流程。
S1314、终端向第一目标SN发起随机接入。
示例性的，本申请实施例对于上述步骤S1312和步骤S1314的执行顺序并不进行限定，图13仅以先执行S1312，再执行S1314为例进行示意。
S1315、在终端和第一目标SN接入成功的情况下，MN分别向第一候选SN发送第一消息，该第一消息用于指示第一候选SN释放第一候选SN的SCG配置。
可以理解的，步骤S1315的具体实现方式可以和步骤S604相同，在此不再赘述。
S1316、在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端执行以下一项或多项：终端确定停止条件SN的添加或变更的判断；或者，终端忽视或删除至少一个候选SN的SCG配置；或者，终端忽视或删除触发条件。
S1317、在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端将满足触发条件的候选SN确定为目标MN，且，终端释放MN；或者，终端将满足触发条件的候选SN确定为目标MN，且，终端将MN切换为第一目标SN。
可以理解的，步骤S1316-S1317的具体实现方式可以和步骤S605-S606相同，在此不再赘述。
本申请实施例在MN发起的条件SN变更流程中，通过MN向终端发送第一信号质量参数门限值，从而使得终端在确定目标SN之前，先确定其连接的第一小区的信号质量情况，并在第一小区的信号质量较好的情况下，再进一步确定目标SN，使得终端变更至目标SN之前第一小区的信号质量能够得到保证，从而确保终端在双连接模式的信号质量，提升用户体验。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信方法，如图14所示，应用在SN发起的条件SN变更的流程中，该方法可以包括步骤S1401-S1417。
S1401、源SN向MN发送SN变更申请消息，该SN变更申请消息用于指示条件SN变更。
示例性的，该SN变更申请消息(SN Change required)包括至少一个候选SN的标识和其对应的SCG配置。可选的，SN变更申请消息还可以包括候选SN的测量结果，该测量结果用于辅助MN确定是否接收条件SN的变更请求。
示例性的，该SN变更申请消息可以添加条件变更的指示或条件指示。
可选的，上述步骤S1401中源SN也可以向MN发送条件SN变更申请消息(Conditional SN Change required)。
S1402、MN接收SN变更申请消息。
S1403、MN向候选SN发送SN添加请求消息。
该MN为步骤S601中的第一接入网设备。SN添加请求消息中携带条件变更的指示或条件指示。
上述候选SN可以为一个或多个，本申请实施例对此并不进行限定。在候选SN为多个的情况下，MN向多个候选SN分别发送SN添加请求消息，指示候选SN为终端 分配无线资源。
可选的，上述步骤S1403中MN也可以向候选SN发送条件SN添加请求消息(Conditional SN Addition Request)。
如图14所示，图14中的候选SN包括第一目标SN和第一候选SN。
S1404、候选SN接收SN添加请求消息。
S1405、候选SN向MN发送SN添加请求确认消息。
示例性的，该SN添加请求确认消息中携带条件变更的指示或条件指示。
示例性的，在候选SN接受MN发送的资源请求的情况下，候选SN向MN发送SN添加请求确认消息，该SN添加请求确认消息中携带该候选SN为终端分配的SCG配置。
可选的，上述步骤S1405中候选SN也可以向MN发送条件SN添加请求确认消息(Conditional SN Addition Request Acknowledge)。
S1406、MN接收SN添加请求确认消息。
可以理解的，步骤S1403-S1406的具体实现方式可以和步骤S607-S610相同，在此不再赘述。
S1407、MN向终端发送第一信息，第一信息包括第一信号质量参数门限值和触发条件，该触发条件为终端变更至第一目标SN的触发条件。
S1408、终端接收第一信息。
示例性的，基于第一信息，可以将第一小区的信号质量参数与第一信号质量参数门限值的大小分为两种情况。在第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端可以执行步骤S1409-S1415；在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端执行步骤S1416或S1417。如图14所示，在第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端执行步骤S1409-S1415为图14中的情况一；在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端执行步骤S1416为图14中的情况二；在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端执行步骤S1417为图14中的情况三。上述情况一、情况二和情况三为并列的三种情况。
S1409、终端基于第一信息，在第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，将满足触发条件的候选SN确定为第一目标SN。
可以理解的，步骤S1407-S1409的具体实现方式可以和步骤S601-S603相同，在此不再赘述。
S1410、终端向MN发送RRC重配置完成消息。
示例性的，终端应用第一目标SN的SCG配置，并向MN发送RRC重配置完成消息，该RRC重配置完成消息中携带第一目标SN变更成功的指示。
S1411、MN向源SN发送SN变更确认消息。
该SN变更确认消息用于确认源SN的释放。该SN变更确认消息中携带变更指示。
可选的，步骤S21411中MN也可以向源SN发送条件SN变更确认消息。
S1412、源SN接收SN变更确认消息。
示例性的，源SN接收SN变更确认消息后，将释放之前分配给终端的资源，并停 止向终端发送数据。
S1413、MN向第一目标SN发送SN重配置完成消息。
该SN重配置完成消息中携带条件重配的指示。
可选的，步骤S1413中MN也可以向第一目标SN发送条件SN重配置完成消息，以告知第一目标SN，终端已完成条件SN的变更流程。
S1414、终端向第一目标SN发起随机接入。
示例性的，本申请实施例对于上述步骤S1410和步骤S1414的执行顺序并不进行限定，图14仅以先执行S1410，再执行S1414为例进行示意。
S1415、在终端和第一目标SN接入成功的情况下，MN分别向第一候选SN发送第一消息，该第一消息用于指示第一候选SN释放第一候选SN的SCG配置。
可以理解的，步骤S1415的具体实现方式可以和步骤S604相同，在此不再赘述。
S1416、在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端执行以下一项或多项：终端确定停止条件SN的添加或变更的判断；或者，终端忽视或删除至少一个候选SN的SCG配置；或者，终端忽视或删除触发条件。
S1417、在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端将满足触发条件的候选SN确定为目标MN，且，终端释放MN；或者，终端将满足触发条件的候选SN确定为目标MN，且，终端将MN切换为第一目标SN。
可以理解的，步骤S1416-S1417的具体实现方式可以和步骤S605-S606相同，在此不再赘述。
本申请实施例在SN发起的条件SN变更流程中，通过MN向终端发送第一信号质量参数门限值，从而使得终端在确定目标SN之前，先确定其连接的第一小区的信号质量情况，并在第一小区的信号质量较好的情况下，再进一步确定目标SN，使得终端变更至目标SN之前第一小区的信号质量能够得到保证，从而确保终端在双连接模式的信号质量，提升用户体验。
本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法，如图15所示，为该通信方法包括步骤S1500-S1503。
S1500、第一接入网设备确定第一信号质量参数门限值。
该第一信号质量参数门限值用于终端确定第一小区的信号质量情况，关于第一信号质量参数门限值的相关描述可以和步骤S600相同，在此不再赘述。
S1501、第一接入网设备向终端发送第二信息。
该第二信息包括第一信号质量参数门限值和触发条件，该触发条件为终端变更至第一目标PSCell或添加第一目标PSCell的触发条件。
示例性的，上述触发条件为终端添加第一目标PSCell的触发条件时，该终端在添加第一目标PSCell之前，可以仅通过第一接入网设备传输数据。该终端通过第一接入网设备传输数据时，可以进行载波聚合，即终端可以同时使用第一接入网设备管理的多个小区(其中一个是主小区PCell，其它是辅小区SCell)进行上下行通信，从而提高数据传输速率。上述第一小区为终端工作在单连接模式下进行载波聚合的PCell。可选的，该第一小区也可以为终端工作在单连接单小区模式下的服务小区。
示例性的，上述触发条件为终端变更至第一目标PSCell的触发条件时，该终端在 变更至第一目标PSCell之前，可以通过源SN管理的PSCell和第一接入网设备管理的PCell传输数据。即该终端在变更至第一目标PSCell之前，工作在双连接模式，该第一接入网设备为终端在双连接通信时的主节点MN。上述第一小区为终端工作在双连接模式下，由MN管理的PCell。
可选的，上述第二信息还可以包括至少一个候选PSCell的配置，该至少一个候选PSCell包括第一目标PSCell。示例性的，该至少一个候选PSCell可以为一个接入网设备管理的小区，也可以为不同接入网设备管理的小区。
例如，至少一个候选PSCell为一个接入网设备管理的小区时，如果该候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备为终端变更至第一目标PSCell之前，终端在双连接通信时的SN。那么，终端变更至该第一目标PSCell时，终端所属的接入网设备没有发生改变，但终端连接的PSCell改变了。也就是说，终端变更至第一目标PSCell时，可能是站内切换(intra-SN PSCell Change)，即变更至第一目标PSCell之前终端连接的辅小区，与该第一目标PSCell属于同一个接入网设备管理的小区。
再例如，终端变更至第一目标PSCell时，也可能是站间切换(inter-SN PSCell Change)，即终端变更至第一目标PSCell之前终端连接的辅小区，与该第一目标PSCell属于不同接入网设备管理的小区。本申请实施例对于终端变更至第一目标PSCell时，是站内切换还是站间切换并不进行限定。
示例性的，上述第二信息可以携带在一个消息中，也可以携带在多个消息中。例如，第二信息可以携带在RRC重配置消息(例如，RRC Connection Reconfiguration或RRC Reconfiguration)中。再例如，第二信息中的触发条件可以携带在RRC重配置消息中，第二信息中的第一信号质量参数门限值可以携带在系统消息中。可选的，该第二信息还包括至少一个候选PSCell的配置时，该至少一个候选PSCell的配置也可以携带在RRC重配置消息中。本申请实施例对于第二信息的具体携带方法并不进行限定，在此仅是示例性说明。
示例性的，上述第二信息包括的第一信号质量参数门限值和触发条件，可以是由MN决定，也可以是由SN决定，还可以是由MN和SN协商决定，本申请实施例对此并不进行限定。上述候选PSCell可以是由管理该候选PSCell的第二接入网设备决定的。
S1502、终端接收第二信息。
示例性的，在第二信息携带在RRC重配置消息的情况下，终端接收RRC重配置消息，获取第二信息。在第二信息携带在RRC重配置消息和系统消息的情况下，终端接收RRC重配置消息，获取触发条件，终端接收系统消息，获取第一信号质量参数门限值。
S1503、终端基于第二信息，在第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，将满足触发条件的候选PSCell确定为第一目标PSCell。
第一小区为第一接入网设备管理的小区。
可以理解的，上述第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于第一信号质量参数门限值的具体实现方式与步骤S603相同，具体可以参考步骤S603，在此不再赘述。
示例性的，在终端应用候选PSCell的配置成功时，终端可以基于第二信息中的第一信号质量参数门限值确定其连接的第一小区的信号质量，在第一小区的信号质量参 数大于或等于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端确定第一小区的信号质量较好。再进一步将至少一个候选PSCell中满足触发条件的候选PSCell确定为第一目标PSCell。从而避免第一接入网设备下发触发条件的时间与终端确定满足触发条件的目标PSCell的时间存在时间差时，由于第一小区的信号质量下降过多导致终端的双连接体验下降的问题。
示例性的，在第一小区为终端工作在单连接单小区模式下的服务小区，或，终端工作在单连接模式下进行载波聚合的主小区的情况下，终端先判断该第一小区的信号质量情况，在该第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端进一步将满足触发条件的候选PSCell确定为第一目标PSCell。可选的，终端可以向其确定的第一目标PSCell所属的第二接入网设备发起随机接入，终端与该第二接入网设备接入成功时，该终端工作在双连接模式下。其中，第一接入网设备为终端工作在双连接模式时的MN，第二接入网设备为终端工作在双连接模式时的SN。
示例性的，在第一小区为终端工作在双连接模式下，由MN管理的主小区的情况下，终端先判断该第一小区的信号质量情况，在该第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端进一步将满足触发条件的候选PSCell确定为第一目标PSCell。可选的，终端可以向其确定的第一目标PSCell所属的第二接入网设备发起随机接入，终端与该第二接入网设备接入成功时，该终端可以同时通过第一接入网设备和第二接入网设备传输数据，其中，第一接入网设备为终端工作在双连接模式时的MN，第二接入网设备为终端工作在双连接模式时的SN。
可选的，一种实现方式中，上述第二接入网设备可以为终端变更至第一目标PSCell之前，终端在双连接通信时的辅节点SN。在该实现方式中，终端变更至第一目标PSCell时，是站内切换PSCell。另一种实现方式中，上述第二接入网设备也可以为候选的SN，该候选的SN与终端变更至第一目标PSCell之前，终端在双连接通信时的SN不同。在该实现方式中，终端变更至第一目标PSCell时，是站间切换PSCell。本申请实施例对于终端变更至第一目标PSCell时，是站内切换还是站间切换并不进行限定。
本实施例通过第一接入网设备向终端下发第一信号质量参数的门限值，从而使得终端在确定目标PSCell之前，先确定第一小区的信号质量情况，在终端确定其连接的第一小区的信号质量较好的情况下，再进一步确定目标PSCell，能够确保终端在双连接模式的信号质量，提升用户体验。
本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，通过第一接入网设备向终端发送第二信息；终端接收第二信息；终端基于第二信息，在第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，将满足触发条件的候选PSCell确定为第一目标PSCell。本实施例通过终端在确定目标PSCell之前，先确定第一小区的信号质量情况，并在第一小区的信号质量较好的情况下，再进一步确定目标PSCell，使得终端变更或添加PSCell之前第一小区的信号质量能够得到保证，从而确保终端在双连接模式的信号质量，提升用户体验。
可选的，本申请实施例还提供一种通信方法，如图16所示，在终端和上述第一目标PSCell接入成功的情况下，在上述步骤S1500-S1503之后，还可以包括步骤S1504。
S1504、第一接入网设备分别向第一候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备发送第五 消息，该第五消息用于指示第一候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备释放第一候选PSCell的配置。
上述至少一个候选PSCell包括第一候选PSCell，该第一候选PSCell与第一目标PSCell为不同接入网设备管理的小区。即上述至少一个候选PSCell可以为多个第二接入网设备管理的小区，管理第一目标PSCell的第二接入网设备，与管理上述第一候选PSCell的第二接入网设备为不同的接入网设备。
示例性的，以至少一个候选PSCell包括T-PSCell1、T-PSCell2、T-PSCell3和T-PSCell4为例，其中，基站1管理T-PSCell1和T-PSCell2，基站2管理T-PSCell3，基站3管理T-PSCell4。若步骤S1503中确定的第一目标PSCell为T-PSCell1，那么在终端和该T-PSCell 1所属的基站1接入成功的情况下，第一接入网设备向第一候选PSCell(T-PSCell3和T-PSCell4)所属的第二接入网设备(基站2和基站3)发送第五消息，指示基站2释放T-PSCell3的配置、基站3释放T-PSCell4的配置。
可选的，上述第五消息可以为释放请求消息。
本实施例通过向第一候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备发送释放请求消息，请求该第二接入网设备释放其为终端分配的PSCell的配置，从而能够节省该第二接入网设备的无线资源。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信方法，如图17所示，在终端确定第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，在上述步骤S1500-S1502之后还可以包括步骤S1505。
S1505、在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端执行以下一项或多项：终端确定停止条件PSCell的添加或变更的判断；或者，终端忽视至少一个候选PSCell的配置；或者，终端忽视触发条件；或者，终端删除至少一个候选PSCell的配置；或者，终端删除触发条件。
上述终端停止条件PSCell的添加或变更的判断包括：终端停止判断至少一个候选PSCell是否满足触发条件。
第一种实现方式中，在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端确定其当前连接的第一小区的信号质量较差，终端可以停止判断至少一个候选PSCell是否满足上述触发条件。可选的，终端停止判断至少一个候选PSCell是否满足上述触发条件可以包括：终端停止预设时长后，确定第一小区的信号质量情况，如果第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于第一信号质量参数门限值，继续判断至少一个候选PSCell是否满足上述触发条件；如果第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值，终端再停止预设时长。或者，终端停止判断至少一个候选PSCell是否满足上述触发条件，并持续检测第一小区的信号质量，在第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端继续判断至少一个候选PSCell是否满足上述触发条件。
第二种实现方式中，在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端忽视或删除至少一个候选PSCell的配置。终端忽视至少一个候选PSCell的配置包括终端维持当前配置，即终端不执行添加或变更流程。
第三种实现方式中，在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的 情况下，终端忽视或删除触发条件。
本实施例在第一小区的信号质量较差的情况下，终端执行以下一项或多项：终端确定停止条件PSCell的添加或变更的判断；或者，终端忽视或删除至少一个候选PSCell的配置；或者，终端忽视或删除触发条件。从而避免在第一小区的信号质量较差的情况下，进行条件PSCell的变更或条件PSCell的添加，造成终端在双连接模式的信号质量不能得到保证，用户体验较差的问题。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信方法，如图18所示，在终端确定第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，在上述步骤S1500-S1502之后还可以包括步骤S1506。
S1506、在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端将满足触发条件的候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备确定为目标MN，且，终端释放第一接入网设备；或者，终端将满足触发条件的候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备确定为目标MN，且，终端将第一接入网设备切换为目标SN。
第一种实现方式中，在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端可以将满足触发条件的信号质量较好的候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备确定为第一目标MN，并释放信号质量较差的MN(第一接入网设备)。从而确保终端连接的MN的信号质量较好。
例如，终端在变更PSCell之前，终端通过MN和源SN同时传输数据，在发起条件PSCell变更流程后，在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端可以将触发条件的信号质量较好的候选T-PSCell1所属的第二接入网设备确定为目标MN，并释放MN。即终端可以通过目标MN和源SN同时传输数据。
第二种实现方式中，在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端可以将满足触发条件的信号质量较好的候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备确定为目标MN，将信号质量较差的MN(第一接入网设备)切换为目标SN。
例如，终端在变更PSCell之前，终端通过MN和源SN同时传输数据，在发起条件PSCell变更流程后，在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端可以将触发条件的信号质量较好的候选T-PSCell1所属的第二接入网设备确定为目标MN，并将MN切换为目标SN。即终端可以通过目标MN和目标SN同时传输数据。
本实施例通过在终端连接的第一小区的信号较差的情况下，可以将信号质量较好的候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备确定为目标MN，从而确保终端连接的目标MN的信号质量较好，以提高数据的传输效率，提升用户体验。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信方法，如图19所示，在上述步骤S1500之前还可以包括步骤S1507-S1510。
S1507、第一接入网设备分别向至少一个候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备发送第六消息，第六消息用于请求第二接入网设备为终端分配无线资源。
该第六消息包括条件PSCell添加或条件PSCell变更的指示信息。
示例性的，上述触发条件为终端添加目标PSCell的触发条件时，该第六消息可以为条件SN添加请求消息(Conditional SN Addition Request)或SN添加请求消息(SN  Addition Request)。该SN添加请求消息中携带PSCell添加的指示信息。上述触发条件为终端变更至目标PSCell的触发条件时，且终端变更至目标PSCell为站间切换时，该第六消息可以为条件SN添加请求消息或SN添加请求消息。上述触发条件为终端变更至目标PSCell的触发条件时，且终端变更至目标PSCell为站内切换时，且上述PSCell的变更是由MN发起的，该第六信息可以为条件SN修改请求消息(Conditional SN Modification Request)或SN修改请求消息(SN Modification Request)。上述触发条件为终端变更至目标PSCell的触发条件时，且终端变更至目标PSCell为站内切换时，且，上述PSCell的变更是由SN发起的，该第六信息可以为条件SN修改申请消息(Conditional SN Modification Required)或SN修改申请消息(SN Modification Required)。
示例性的，以至少一个候选PSCell包括T-PSCell1、T-PSCell2和T-PSCell3为例，该T-PSCell1和T-PSCell2为基站1管理的小区、T-PSCell3为基站2管理的小区。第一接入网设备可以分别向基站1和基站2发送第六消息，请求基站1和基站2为终端分配无线资源。
可选的，在多个候选PSCell为一个第二接入网设备管理的小区的情况下，第一接入网设备可以向该第二接入网设备发送第六消息，该第六消息中携带第一列表，该第六消息用于指示该第二接入网设备的每个候选PSCell为终端分配相应的无线资源；或者，在多个候选PSCell为一个第二接入网设备管理的小区的情况下，第一接入网设备可以向该第二接入网设备分别发送多个第六消息，每个第六消息用于指示该第二接入网设备管理的一个候选PSCell为终端分配相应的无线资源。
S1508、候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备接收第六消息。
示例性的，第二接入网设备可以接收条件SN添加请求消息或SN添加请求消息。
S1509、候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备向第一接入网设备发送第七消息，第七消息包括第二接入网设备分配的候选PSCell配置。
示例性的，上述触发条件为终端添加目标PSCell的触发条件时，该第七消息可以为条件SN添加请求确认消息(Conditional SN Addition Request Acknowledge)或SN添加请求确认消息(SN Addition Request Acknowledge)。该SN添加请求确认消息中携带PSCell添加或PSCell变更的指示信息。上述触发条件为终端变更至目标PSCell的触发条件时，且终端变更至目标PSCell为站间切换时，该第七消息可以为条件SN添加请求确认消息或SN添加请求确认消息。上述触发条件为终端变更至目标PSCell的触发条件时，且终端变更至目标PSCell为站内切换时，且上述PSCell的变更是由MN发起的，该第七信息可以为条件SN修改请求确认消息(Conditional SN Modification Request Acknowledge)或SN修改请求确认消息(SN Modification Request Acknowledge)。上述触发条件为终端变更至目标PSCell的触发条件时，且终端变更至目标PSCell为站内切换时，且，上述PSCell的变更是由SN发起的，该第七信息可以为条件SN修改申请确认消息(Conditional SN Modification Required Acknowledge)或SN修改申请确认消息(SN Modification Required Acknowledge)。
示例性的，以至少一个候选PSCell包括T-PSCell1、T-PSCell2和T-PSCell3为例，该T-PSCell1和T-PSCell2为基站1管理的小区、T-PSCell3为基站2管理的小区。如 果基站1和基站2可以接受第一接入网设备发送的资源请求，基站1可以向第一接入网设备发送第七消息，该第七消息包括基站1分配的T-PSCell1和T-PSCell2的配置；基站2可以向第一接入网设备发送第七消息，该第七消息包括基站2分配的T-PSCell3的配置。
可选的，上述第二接入网设备分配的候选PSCell的配置可以全量配置或增量配置。上述第七消息还可以包括全量RRC配置(full RRC configuration)或者增量RRC配置(delta RRC configuration)的指示。可选的，如果第七消息包括增量RRC配置的指示，那么在上述步骤S1507之前，第一接入网设备可以向源SN请求当前的PSCell的配置。
S1510、第一接入网设备接收第七消息。
示例性的，第一接入网设备可以接收第二接入网设备发送的条件SN添加请求确认消息或SN添加请求确认消息。
本实施例可以通过第一接入网设备向至少一个候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备发送SN添加请求消息，用于请求第二接入网设备为终端分配资源，在第二接入网设备接收第一接入网设备发送的资源请求的情况下，第二接入网设备向第一接入网设备发送携带候选PSCell配置的SN添加请求确认消息，从而第一接入网设备才可以向终端发送RRC重配置信息，指示终端进行PSCell的变更或添加。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信方法，如图20所示，在上述步骤S1501之后还可以包括步骤S1511-S1514。
S1511、第一接入网设备向终端发送第八消息，第八消息用于指示终端进行PSCell的添加或PSCell的变更。
第八消息包括第二目标PSCell配置。该第八消息可以为RRC重配置消息。
示例性的，第一接入网设备向终端发送的第八消息，指示终端进行PSCell的变更或PSCell的添加。与步骤S1501中发送的RRC重配置消息不同的是，步骤S1511指示终端进行传统的不带条件判断的PSCell添加或变更，即指示终端添加或变更至该第二目标PSCell。而步骤S1501中指示终端进行的是带条件判断的PSCell条件或变更，即需要在至少一个候选PSCell中，将满足触发条件的候选PSCell确定为第一目标PSCell，再添加或变更至该第一目标PSCell。也就是第一接入网设备发起了条件PSCell的添加或变更流程后，又发起了传统的PSCell的添加或变更流程。
S1512、终端接收第八消息。
S1513、终端停止条件PSCell添加或条件PSCell变更的流程，执行PSCell的添加或PSCell的变更流程。
示例性的，上述条件PSCell添加或条件PSCell变更的流程可以包括：终端比较第一小区的信号质量参数与第一信号质量参数门限值的大小，或者，终端确定候选PSCell是否满足触发条件。
例如，终端在接收来自第一接入网设备的第八消息时，如果终端正在比较第一小区的信号质量参数与第一信号质量参数门限值的大小，终端将停止比较第一小区的信号质量参数与第一信号质量参数门限值的大小，添加第二目标PSCell或变更至第二目标PSCell。再例如，终端在接收来自第一接入网设备的第八消息时，如果终端正在确定候选PSCell是否满足触发条件，终端将停止确定候选PSCell是否满足触发条件，添 加第二目标PSCell或变更至第二目标PSCell。
示例性的，在第一接入网设备发起了条件PSCell的添加或变更流程后，又发起了传统的PSCell的添加或变更流程的情况下，终端可以停止条件PSCell添加或条件PSCell变更的流程，执行PSCell的添加或PSCell的变更流程。即传统的PSCell的添加或变更的优先级高于条件PSCell的添加或变更的优先级。在终端执行条件PSCell添加或条件PSCell变更的流程过程中，如果又接收到了传统PSCell的添加或PSCell的变更的指示，终端将停止条件PSCell添加或条件PSCell变更的流程，执行PSCell的添加或PSCell的变更流程。
可选的，如果终端执行PSCell的添加或PSCell的变更流程后，终端和第二目标PSCell接入失败，那么终端可以继续执行条件PSCell添加或条件PSCell变更的流程。
(可选的)S1514、在终端和第二目标PSCell接入成功的情况下，终端删除至少一个候选PSCell的配置。
示例性的，在终端和第二目标PSCell接入成功的情况下，终端可以将条件PSCell添加或变更流程中至少一个候选PSCell的配置删除。
可选的，在终端和第二目标SN接入成功的情况下，终端还可以将条件PSCell添加或变更流程中的触发条件删除。
本实施例在第一接入网设备发起了条件PSCell的添加或变更流程后，又发起了传统的PSCell的添加或变更流程的情况下，终端可以停止条件PSCell添加或条件PSCell变更的流程，执行PSCell的添加或PSCell的变更流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信方法，如图21所示，应用在条件SN添加的流程中，该方法可以包括步骤S2101-S2113。
S2101、第一接入网设备向至少一个候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备发送SN添加请求消息。
示例性的，该SN添加请求消息中携带条件添加的指示或条件指示。
该至少一个候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备可以为一个也可以多个，本申请实施例对此并不进行限定。在候选PSCell为多个，该多个候选PSCell为至少一个第二接入网设备管理的小区的情况下，第一接入网设备向至少一个第二接入网设备分别发送SN添加请求消息，指示第二接入网设备为终端分配无线资源。
可选的，上述步骤S2101中第一接入网设备也可以向至少一个候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备发送条件SN添加请求消息(Conditional SN Addition Request)。
如图21所示，图21中的至少一个候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备包括第一目标PSCell所属的第二接入网设备和第一候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备。
S2102、候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备接收第一接入网设备发送的SN添加请求消息。
S2103、候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备向第一接入网设备发送SN添加请求确认消息。
示例性的，该SN添加请求确认消息中携带条件添加的指示或条件指示。
示例性的，在第二接入网设备接受第一接入网设备发送的资源请求的情况下，第二接入网设备向第一接入网设备发送SN添加请求确认消息，该SN添加请求确认消息 中携带该第二接入网设备为终端分配的候选PSCell的配置。
可选的，上述步骤S2103中候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备也可以向第一接入网设备发送条件SN添加请求确认消息(Conditional SN Addition Request Acknowledge)。
S2104、第一接入网设备接收SN添加请求确认消息。
可以理解的，步骤S2101-S2104的具体实现方式可以和步骤S1507-S1510相同，在此不再赘述。
S2105、第一接入网设备向终端发送第二信息，第二信息包括第一信号质量参数门限值和触发条件，该触发条件为终端添加第一目标PSCell的触发条件。
S2106、终端接收第二信息。
示例性的，基于第一信息，可以将第一小区的信号质量参数与第一信号质量参数门限值的大小分为两种情况。在第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端可以执行步骤S2107-S2111；在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端执行步骤S2112或S2113。如图21所示，在第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端执行步骤S2107-S2111为图21中的情况一；在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端执行步骤S2112为图21中的情况二；在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端执行步骤S2113为图21中的情况三。上述情况一、情况二和情况三为并列的三种情况。
S2107、终端基于第二信息，在第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，将满足触发条件的候选PSCell确定为第一目标PSCell。
可以理解的，步骤S2105-S2107的具体实现方式可以和步骤S1501-S1503相同，在此不再赘述。
S2108、终端向第一接入网设备发送RRC重配置完成消息。
示例性的，终端应用第一目标PSCell的配置，并向第一接入网设备发送RRC重配置完成消息，该RRC重配置完成消息中携带第一目标PSCell添加成功的指示。
S2109、第一接入网设备向第一目标PSCell所属的第二接入网设备发送SN重配置完成消息。
该SN重配置完成消息中携带条件重配的指示。
可选的，步骤S2109中第一接入网设备也可以向第一目标PSCell所属的第二接入网设备发送条件SN重配置完成消息，以告知第一目标PSCell所属的第二接入网设备，终端已完成条件PSCell的添加流程。
S2110、终端向第一目标PSCell所属的第二接入网设备发起随机接入。
示例性的，本申请实施例对于上述步骤S2108和步骤S2110的执行顺序并不进行限定，图21仅以先执行S2108，再执行S2110为例进行示意。
S2111、在终端和第一目标PSCell接入成功的情况下，第一接入网设备分别向第一候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备发送第五消息，该第五消息用于指示第一候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备释放第一候选PSCell的配置。
可以理解的，步骤S2111的具体实现方式可以和步骤S1504相同，在此不再赘述。
S2112、在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端执行以下一项或多项：终端确定停止条件PSCell的添加或变更的判断；或者，终端忽视或删除至少一个候选PSCell的配置；或者，终端忽视或删除触发条件。
S2113、在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端将满足触发条件的候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备确定为目标MN，且，终端释放第一接入网设备；或者，终端将满足触发条件的候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备确定为目标MN，且，终端将第一接入网设备切换为目标SN。
可以理解的，步骤S2112-S2113的具体实现方式可以和步骤S1505-S1506相同，在此不再赘述。
本申请实施例在条件PSCell添加流程中，通过第一接入网设备向终端发送第一信号质量参数门限值，从而使得终端在确定目标PSCell之前，先确定其连接的第一小区的信号质量情况，并在第一小区的信号质量较好的情况下，再进一步确定目标PSCell，使得终端添加PSCell之前第一小区的信号质量能够得到保证，从而确保终端在双连接模式的信号质量，提升用户体验。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信方法，如图22所示，应用在MN发起的条件PSCell变更的流程中，该方法可以包括步骤S2201-S2217。
S2201、MN向至少一个候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备发送第六消息。
该MN为步骤S1501中的第一接入网设备。
示例性的，在终端变更至目标PSCell为站间切换时，该第六消息可以为条件SN添加请求消息或SN添加请求消息。该SN添加请求消息中携带条件变更的指示或条件指示。在终端变更至目标PSCell为站内切换时，该第六信息可以为条件SN修改请求消息(Conditional SN Modification Request)或SN修改请求消息(SN Modification Request)。该SN修改请求消息中携带条件变更的指示或条件指示。
上述至少一个候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备可以为一个也可以多个，本申请实施例对此并不进行限定。在候选PSCell为多个，该多个候选PSCell为至少一个第二接入网设备管理的小区，终端变更至目标PSCell为站间切换的情况下，第一接入网设备向至少一个第二接入网设备分别发送SN添加请求消息，指示第二接入网设备为终端分配无线资源。
如图22所示，图22中的至少一个候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备包括第一目标PSCell所属的第二接入网设备和第一候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备。
S2202、候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备接收MN发送的第六消息。
S2203、候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备向MN发送第七消息。
示例性的，在终端变更至目标PSCell为站间切换时，该第七消息可以为条件SN添加请求确认消息(Conditional SN Addition Request Acknowledge)或SN添加请求确认消息(SN Addition Request Acknowledge)。该SN添加请求确认消息中携带条件变更的指示或条件指示。在终端变更至目标PSCell为站内切换时，该第七信息可以为条件SN修改请求确认消息(Conditional SN Modification Request Acknowledge)或SN修改请求确认消息(SN Modification Request Acknowledge)。该SN修改请求确认消息中携带条件变更的指示或条件指示。
示例性的，在第二接入网设备接受MN发送的资源请求，终端变更至目标PSCell为站间切换的情况下，第二接入网设备向MN发送SN添加请求确认消息，该SN添加请求确认消息中携带该第二接入网设备为终端分配的候选PSCell的配置。
S2204、MN接收条件第七消息。
可以理解的，步骤S2201-S2204的具体实现方式可以和步骤S1507-S1510相同，在此不再赘述。
S2205、MN向源SN发送SN释放请求消息。
该SN释放请求消息用于指示源SN释放其资源。
S2206、源SN接收SN释放请求消息。
示例性的，源SN接收SN释放请求消息后，不再向终端发送数据。
S2207、源SN向MN发送SN释放请求确认消息。
S2208、MN接收SN释放请求确认消息。
S2209、MN向终端发送第二信息，第二信息包括第一信号质量参数门限值和触发条件，该触发条件为终端变更至第一目标PSCell的触发条件。
S2210、终端接收第二信息。
示例性的，基于第一信息，可以将第一小区的信号质量参数与第一信号质量参数门限值的大小分为两种情况。在第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端可以执行步骤S2211-S2215；在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端执行步骤S2216或S2217。如图22所示，在第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端执行步骤S2211-S2215为图22中的情况一；在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端执行步骤S2216为图22中的情况二；在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端执行步骤S2217为图22中的情况三。上述情况一、情况二和情况三为并列的三种情况。
S2211、终端基于第二信息，在第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，将满足触发条件的候选PSCell确定为第一目标PSCell。
可以理解的，步骤S2209-S2211的具体实现方式可以和步骤S1501-S1503相同，在此不再赘述。
S2212、终端向MN发送RRC重配置完成消息。
示例性的，终端应用第一目标PSCell的配置，并向MN发送RRC重配置完成消息，该RRC重配置完成消息中携带第一目标PSCell变更成功的指示。
S2213、MN向第一目标PSCell所属的第二接入网设备发送SN重配置完成消息。
该SN重配置完成消息中携带条件重配的指示。
可选的，步骤S2213中MN也可以向第一目标PSCell所属的第二接入网设备发送条件SN重配置完成消息，以告知第一目标PSCell所属的第二接入网设备，终端已完成条件PSCell的变更流程。
S2214、终端向第一目标PSCell所属的第二接入网设备发起随机接入。
示例性的，本申请实施例对于上述步骤S2212和步骤S2214的执行顺序并不进行限定，图22仅以先执行S2212，再执行S2214为例进行示意。
S2215、在终端和第一目标PSCell接入成功的情况下，MN分别向第一候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备发送第五消息，该第五消息用于指示第一候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备释放第一候选PSCell的配置。
可以理解的，步骤S2215的具体实现方式可以和步骤S1504相同，在此不再赘述。
S2216、在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端执行以下一项或多项：终端确定停止条件PSCell的添加或变更的判断；或者，终端忽视或删除至少一个候选PSCell的配置；或者，终端忽视或删除触发条件。
S2217、在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端将满足触发条件的候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备确定为目标MN，且，终端释放MN；或者，终端将满足触发条件的候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备确定为目标MN，且，终端将MN切换为目标SN。
可以理解的，步骤S2216-S2217的具体实现方式可以和步骤S1505-S1506相同，在此不再赘述。
本申请实施例在MN发起的条件PSCell变更流程中，通过MN向终端发送第一信号质量参数门限值，从而使得终端在确定目标SN之前，先确定其连接的第一小区的信号质量情况，并在第一小区的信号质量较好的情况下，再进一步确定目标PSCell，使得终端变更至目标PSCell之前第一小区的信号质量能够得到保证，从而确保终端在双连接模式的信号质量，提升用户体验。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信方法，如图23所示，应用在SN发起的条件PSCell变更的流程中，该方法可以包括步骤S2301-S2317。
S2301、源SN向MN发送SN变更申请消息，该SN变更申请消息用于指示条件SN变更。
示例性的，该SN变更申请消息(SN Change required)包括至少一个候选PSCell的标识和其对应的配置。可选的，SN变更申请消息还可以包括候选PSCell的测量结果，该测量结果用于辅助MN确定是否接收条件PSCell的变更请求。
示例性的，该SN变更申请消息可以添加条件变更指示或条件指示。
可选的，上述步骤S2301中源SN也可以向MN发送条件SN变更申请消息(Conditional SN Change required)。
S2302、MN接收SN变更申请消息。
S2303、MN向至少一个候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备发送第六消息。
该MN为步骤S1501中的第一接入网设备。
示例性的，在终端变更至目标PSCell为站间切换时，该第六消息可以为条件SN添加请求消息或SN添加请求消息。该SN添加请求消息中携带条件变更的指示或条件指示。在终端变更至目标PSCell为站内切换时，该第六信息可以为条件SN修改申请消息(Conditional SN Modification Required)或SN修改申请消息(SN Modification Required)。该SN修改申请消息中携带条件变更的指示或条件指示。
上述至少一个候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备可以为一个或多个，本申请实施例对此并不进行限定。在第二接入网设备为多个，该至少一个候选PSCell为多个第二接入网设备管理的小区，且终端变更至目标PSCell为站间切换的情况下，第一接入网 设备分别向多个第二接入网设备发送SN添加请求消息，指示第二接入网设备为终端分配无线资源。
如图23所示，图23中的至少一个候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备包括第一目标PSCell所属的第二接入网设备和第一候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备。
S2304、候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备接收第六消息。
S2305、候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备向MN发送第七消息。
示例性的，在终端变更至目标PSCell为站间切换时，该第七消息可以为条件SN添加请求确认消息或SN添加请求确认消息。该SN添加请求确认消息中携带条件变更的指示或条件指示。在终端变更至目标PSCell为站内切换时，该第七信息可以为条件SN修改申请确认消息(Conditional SN Modification Required Acknowledge)或SN修改申请确认消息(SN Modification Required Acknowledge)。该SN修改申请确认消息中携带条件变更的指示或条件指示。
示例性的，在候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备接受MN发送的资源请求，且终端变更至目标PSCell为站间切换的情况下，候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备向MN发送SN添加请求确认消息，该SN添加请求确认消息中携带该第二接入网设备为终端分配的候选PSCell的配置。
S2306、MN接收第七消息。
可以理解的，步骤S2303-S2306的具体实现方式可以和步骤S1507-S1510相同，在此不再赘述。
S2307、MN向终端发送第二信息，第二信息包括第一信号质量参数门限值和触发条件，该触发条件为终端变更至第一目标PSCell的触发条件。
S2308、终端接收第二信息。
示例性的，基于第一信息，可以将第一小区的信号质量参数与第一信号质量参数门限值的大小分为两种情况。在第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端可以执行步骤S2309-S2315；在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端执行步骤S2316或S2317。如图23所示，在第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端执行步骤S2309-S2315为图23中的情况一；在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端执行步骤S2316为图23中的情况二；在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端执行步骤S2317为图23中的情况三。上述情况一、情况二和情况三为并列的三种情况。
S2309、终端基于第二信息，在第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，将满足触发条件的候选PSCell确定为第一目标PSCell。
可以理解的，步骤S2307-S2309的具体实现方式可以和步骤S1501-S1503相同，在此不再赘述。
S2310、终端向MN发送RRC重配置完成消息。
示例性的，终端应用第一目标PSCell的配置，并向MN发送RRC重配置完成消息，该RRC重配置完成消息中携带第一目标PSCell变更成功的指示。
S2311、MN向源SN发送SN变更确认消息。
该SN变更确认消息用于确认源SN的释放。该SN变更确认消息中携带变更指示。
可选的，步骤S2311中MN也可以向源SN发送条件SN变更确认消息。
S2312、源SN接收SN变更确认消息。
示例性的，源SN接收SN变更确认消息后，将释放之前分配给终端的资源，并停止向终端发送数据。
S2313、MN向第一目标PSCell所属的第二接入网设备发送SN重配置完成消息。
该SN重配置完成消息中携带条件重配的指示。
可选的，步骤S2313中MN也可以向第一目标PSCell所属的第二接入网设备发送条件SN重配置完成消息，以告知第一目标PSCell所属的第二接入网设备，终端已完成条件PSCell的变更流程。
S2314、终端向第一目标PSCell所属的第二接入网设备发起随机接入。
示例性的，本申请实施例对于上述步骤S2310和步骤S2314的执行顺序并不进行限定，图23仅以先执行S2310，再执行S2314为例进行示意。
S2315、在终端和第一目标PSCell接入成功的情况下，MN分别向第一候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备发送第五消息，该第五消息用于指示第一候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备释放第一候选SN的SCG配置。
可以理解的，步骤S2315的具体实现方式可以和步骤S1504相同，在此不再赘述。
S2316、在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端执行以下一项或多项：终端确定停止条件PSCell的添加或变更的判断；或者，终端忽视或删除至少一个候选PSCell的配置；或者，终端忽视或删除触发条件。
S2317、在第一小区的信号质量参数小于第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，终端将满足触发条件的候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备确定为目标MN，且，终端释放MN；或者，终端将满足触发条件的候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备确定为目标MN，且，终端将MN切换为目标SN。
可以理解的，步骤S2316-S2317的具体实现方式可以和步骤S1505-S1506相同，在此不再赘述。
本申请实施例在SN发起的条件PSCell变更流程中，通过MN向终端发送第一信号质量参数门限值，从而使得终端在确定目标SN之前，先确定其连接的第一小区的信号质量情况，并在第一小区的信号质量较好的情况下，再进一步确定目标PSCell，使得终端变更至目标PSCell之前第一小区的信号质量能够得到保证，从而确保终端在双连接模式的信号质量，提升用户体验。
本申请还提供一种通信方法，如图24所示，该通信方法包括步骤S2401-S2404。
S2401、第一MN确定触发条件，该触发条件为终端切换至目标MN且变更至目标SN的触发条件。
示例性的，该第一MN为终端切换至目标MN之前，终端在双连接通信时的MN。
示例性的，该触发条件包括第二信号质量参数门限值。该触发条件用于终端根据一个候选MN的信号质量参数和该候选MN对应的候选SN的信号质量参数的函数的结果，同时确定目标MN和目标SN。可以理解的，上述信号质量参数包括：参考信号接收功率RSRP、参考信号接收质量RSRQ、接收信号强度指示RSSI，以及信号与干 扰加噪声比SINR中的一种或多种，本申请实施例对此并不进行限定。
示例性的，上述一个候选MN信号质量参数和该候选MN对应的候选SN的信号质量参数的函数可以包括：候选MN信号质量参数和该候选MN对应的候选SN的信号质量参数的加权和。需要说明的是，该函数也可以其他函数关系，本申请实施例对此并不进行限定。在此仅以上述函数关系为信号质量参数的加权和进行举例说明。
示例性的，以候选MN为T-MN1和T-MN2，T-MN1对应的至少一个候选SN为T-SN1和T-SN2，T-MN2对应的至少一个候选SN为T-SN3和T-SN4为例。上述触发条件用于终端根据T-MN1和其对应的T-SN1的信号质量参数的加权和的结果、T-MN1和其对应的T-SN2信号质量参数的加权和的结果、T-MN2和其对应的T-SN3信号质量参数的加权和的结果、T-MN2和其对应的T-SN4的信号质量参数的加权和的结果，确定目标MN和目标SN。
可选的，上述触发条件还可以包括：候选MN对应的第一权重(或，指示该第一权重的信息)，以及候选SN对应的第二权重(或，指示该第二权重的信息)。示例性的，终端可以根据每个候选MN、该候选MN对应的候选SN的信号质量参数、第一权重和第二权重，同时确定目标MN和目标SN。
示例性的，上述第一权重和第二权重用于计算候选MN和其对应的候选SN的信号质量参数的加权和。
S2402、第一MN向终端发送第三信息。
第三信息包括至少一个候选MN的标识，每个候选MN对应的至少一个候选SN的标识，至少一个候选MN的MCG配置，至少一个候选SN的SCG配置，以及步骤S2401中的触发条件。
示例性的，上述第三信息可以为RRC重配置消息中。
S2403、终端接收来自第一MN的第三信息。
S2404、终端确定目标MN以及目标SN。
其中，该目标MN的信号质量参数以及该目标SN的信号质量参数的函数的结果大于或等于第一信号质量参数门限值。该目标SN为该目标MN对应的一个SN。
示例性的，终端可以计算每个候选MN和该每个候选MN对应的候选SN的信号质量参数之和，并将该每个候选MN和该每个候选MN对应的候选SN的信号质量参数之和大于或等于第二信号质量参数门限值的候选MN和候选SN确定为目标MN和目标SN。
例如，以候选MN为T-MN1和T-MN2，T-MN1对应的至少一个候选SN为T-SN1和T-SN2，T-MN2对应的至少一个候选SN为T-SN3和T-SN4为例。终端可以分别计算T-MN1和T-SN1的信号质量参数之和P1，T-MN1和T-SN2的信号质量参数之和P2，T-MN2和T-SN3的信号质量参数之和P3，T-MN2和T-SN4的信号质量参数之和P4，将每组候选MN和候选SN中信号质量参数之和大于或等于第二信号质量参数门限值的候选MN和候选SN，确定为目标MN和目标SN。
示例性的，在触发条件还可以包括候选MN对应的第一权重，以及候选SN对应的第二权重的情况下，上述步骤S2404包括：终端根据每个候选MN的信号质量参数，该候选MN对应的一个候选SN的信号质量参数，以及第一权重和第二权重，确定候 选MN和候选SN的信号质量参数的加权和；终端将加权和大于或等于第二信号质量参数门限值的候选MN和候选SN，确定为目标MN和目标SN。
示例性的，上述第一权重和第二权重之和可以为1。可选的，第一权重可以大于或等于第二权重。例如，第一权重可以为1，第二权重可以为0。再例如，第一权重可以为0.5，第二权重也可以为0.5。再例如，第一权重可以为0.6，第二权重可以为0.4。
例如，以候选MN为T-MN1和T-MN2，T-MN1对应的至少一个候选SN为T-SN1和T-SN2，T-MN2对应的至少一个候选SN为T-SN3和T-SN4，第一权重为0.6，第二权重为0.4为例。终端可以分别计算T-MN1和T-SN1的信号质量参数的加权和W1，T-MN1和T-SN2的信号质量参数的加权和W2，T-MN2和T-SN3的信号质量参数的加权和W3，T-MN2和T-SN4的信号质量参数的加权和W4，将每组候选MN和候选SN中信号质量参数的加权和大于或等于第二信号质量参数门限值的候选MN和候选SN，确定为目标MN和目标SN。
本实施例通过条件MN切换和条件SN变更的条件组合，能够同时确定目标MN和目标SN。该方案与先通过触发条件确定目标MN，再确定目标SN的方法相比，能够同时确定目标MN和目标SN。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信方法，如图25所示，该方法除上述步骤S2401-S2404之外，比如在上述步骤S2402之后，还可以包括步骤S2405-S2406。
S2405、第一MN向第一SN发送第九消息，第九消息用于指示第一SN不发起条件SN变更。
该第一MN为终端变更至目标MN之前，终端在双连接通信时的MN。第一SN为终端变更至目标SN之前，终端在双连接通信时的SN。即该第一MN为源MN，第一SN为源SN。
示例性的，在第一MN(源MN)向终端发起带条件SN变更的条件MN切换后，第一MN(源MN)可以向第一SN(源SN)发送指示信息，指示源SN不发起条件SN变更，从而避免不同变更场景之间可能发生碰撞的问题。
S2406、第一SN接收第九信息。
示例性的，终端接收第九信息后，不再发起条件SN变更流程。
本实施例通过在源MN向终端发起带条件SN变更的条件MN切换后，指示源SN不发起条件SN变更，从而能够避免不同变更情况之间可能发生碰撞的问题。
本申请还提供一种通信方法，如图26所示，该通信方法包括步骤S2601-S2604。
S2601、第一MN确定触发条件，该触发条件为终端切换至目标MN且变更至目标PSCell的触发条件。
示例性的，该第一MN为终端变更至目标MN之前，终端在双连接通信时的MN。
示例性的，该触发条件包括第二信号质量参数门限值。该触发条件用于终端根据一个候选MN的信号质量参数和该候选MN对应的候选PSCell的信号质量参数的函数的结果，同时确定目标MN和目标PSCell。
示例性的，上述一个候选MN信号质量参数和该候选MN对应的候选PSCell的信号质量参数的函数可以包括：候选MN信号质量参数和该候选MN对应的候选PSCell的信号质量参数的加权和。需要说明的是，该函数也可以其他函数关系，本申请实施 例对此并不进行限定。在此仅以上述函数关系为信号质量参数之和进行举例说明。
示例性的，以候选MN为T-MN1和T-MN2，T-MN1对应的至少一个候选PSCell为T-PSCell1和T-PSCell2，T-MN2对应的至少一个候选PSCell为T-PSCell3和T-PSCell4为例。上述触发条件用于终端根据T-MN1和其对应的T-PSCell1的信号质量参数的加权和的结果、T-MN1和其对应的T-PSCell2的信号质量参数的加权和的结果、T-MN2和其对应的T-PSCell3的信号质量参数的加权和的结果、T-MN2和其对应的T-PSCell4的信号质量参数的加权和的结果，确定目标MN和目标PSCell。
可选的，触发条件还包括候选MN对应的第一权重(或，指示该第一权重的信息)，以及候选PSCell对应的第二权重(或，指示该第二权重的信息)。示例性的，终端可以根据每个候选MN、该候选MN对应的候选PSCell的信号质量参数、第一权重和第二权重，同时确定目标MN和目标SN。
示例性的，上述第一权重和第二权重用于计算候选MN和其对应的候选PSCell的信号质量参数的加权和。
可选的，上述目标PSCell，与终端变更至目标PSCell之前，终端连接的PSCell可以为不同接入网设备管理的小区，也可以为同一个接入网设备管理的小区。例如，终端变更至目标PSCell之前，终端连接的PSCell，与目标PSCell为同一个接入网设备管理的小区时，该终端变更至PSCell时，其连接的接入网设备并未发生变化，可以称为站内PSCell的切换。再例如，终端变更至目标PSCell之前，终端连接的PSCell，与目标PSCell为不同接入网设备管理的小区时，该终端变更至PSCell时，其连接的接入网设备发生变化，可以称为站间PSCell的切换。本申请实施例对于终端变更至目标PSCell时，是站内PSCell切换还是站间PSCell切换并不进行限定。
S2602、第一MN向终端发送第四信息。
第四信息包括至少一个候选MN的标识，每个候选MN对应的至少一个候选PSCell的标识，至少一个候选MN的主小区组MCG配置，所述至少一个候选PSCell的配置，以及步骤S2601中的触发条件。
示例性的，上述第四信息可以为RRC重配置消息中。
S2603、终端接收来自第一MN的第四信息。
S2604、终端确定目标MN以及目标PSCell。
其中，该目标MN的信号质量参数以及该目标PSCell的信号质量参数的函数的结果大于或等于第一信号质量参数门限值。该目标PSCell为该目标MN对应的一个PSCell。
示例性的，终端可以计算每个候选MN和该每个候选MN对应的候选PSCell的信号质量参数之和，并将该每个候选MN和该每个候选MN对应的候选PSCell的信号质量参数之和大于或等于第二信号质量参数门限值的候选MN和候选PSCell确定为目标MN和目标PSCell。
例如，以候选MN为T-MN1和T-MN2，T-MN1对应的至少一个候选PSCell为T-PSCell1和T-PSCell2，T-MN2对应的至少一个候选PSCell为T-PSCell3和T-PSCell4为例。终端可以分别计算T-MN1和T-PSCell1的信号质量参数之加权和P1，T-MN1和T-PSCell2的信号质量参数之加权和P2，T-MN2和T-PSCell3的信号质量参数之加 权和P3，T-MN2和T-PSCell4的信号质量参数之加权和P4，将每组候选MN和候选PSCell中信号质量参数之加权和大于或等于第二信号质量参数门限值的候选MN和候选PSCell，确定为目标MN和目标PSCell。
示例性的，在触发条件还可以包括候选MN对应的第一权重，以及候选PSCell对应的第二权重的情况下，上述步骤S2604包括：终端根据每个候选MN的信号质量参数，该候选MN对应的一个候选PSCell的信号质量参数，以及第一权重和第二权重，确定候选MN和候选PSCell的信号质量参数的加权和；终端将加权和大于或等于第二信号质量参数门限值的候选MN和候选PSCell，确定为目标MN和目标PSCell。
示例性的，上述第一权重和第二权重之和可以为1。可选的，第一权重可以大于或等于第二权重。例如，第一权重可以为1，第二权重可以为0。再例如，第一权重可以为0.5，第二权重也可以为0.5。再例如，第一权重可以为0.6，第二权重可以为0.4。
例如，以候选MN为T-MN1和T-MN2，T-MN1对应的至少一个候选PSCell为T-PSCell1和T-PSCell2，T-MN2对应的至少一个候选PSCell为T-PSCell3和T-PSCell4，第一权重为0.6，第二权重为0.4为例。终端可以分别计算T-MN1和T-PSCell1的信号质量参数的加权和W1，T-MN1和T-PSCell2的信号质量参数的加权和W2，T-MN2和T-PSCell3的信号质量参数的加权和W3，T-MN2和T-PSCell4的信号质量参数的加权和W4，将每组候选MN和候选PSCell中信号质量参数的加权和大于或等于第二信号质量参数门限值的候选MN和候选PSCell，确定为目标MN和目标PSCell。
本实施例通过条件MN切换和条件PSCell变更的条件组合，能够同时确定目标MN和目标PSCell。该方案与先通过触发条件确定目标MN，再确定目标PSCell的方法相比，能够同时确定目标MN和目标PSCell。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信方法，如图27所示，该方法在上述步骤S2601-S2602之外，比如S2602之后，还可以包括步骤S2605-S2606。
S2605、第一MN向第一SN发送第十消息，第十消息用于指示第一SN不发起条件PSCell变更。
该第一MN为终端变更至目标MN之前，终端在双连接通信时的MN。第一SN为终端变更至目标PSCell之前，终端在双连接通信时的SN。即该第一MN可以为源MN。在目标PSCell与终端变更至目标PSCell之前，终端连接的PSCell为不同接入网设备管理的小区的情况下，该第一SN可以为源SN。
示例性的，以终端变更至目标PSCell之前，终端连接的PSCell，与目标PSCell为不同接入网设备管理的小区为例，在源MN向终端发起带条件PSCell变更的条件MN切换后，源MN可以向源SN发送指示信息，指示源SN不发起条件PSCell变更，从而避免不同变更场景之间可能发生碰撞的问题。
S2606、第一SN接收第十信息。
示例性的，终端接收第十信息后，不再发起条件PSCell变更流程。
本实施例通过在源MN向终端发起带条件PSCell变更的条件MN切换后，指示源SN不发起条件PSCell变更，从而能够避免不同变更情况之间可能发生碰撞的问题。
可选的，为了避免不同变更情况之间可能发生碰撞，本申请实施例还提供一种方法，该方法中第一MN发起带条件SN/PSCell变更的条件MN切换后，第一MN不支 持第一SN发起条件SN/PSCell变更；或者，第一MN发起带条件SN/PSCell变更的条件MN切换后，第一MN不发起条件SN/PSCell变更，从而避免不同变更情况之间可能发生碰撞的问题。
上述主要从方法步骤的角度对本申请实施例提供的方案进行了介绍。可以理解的是，计算机为了实现上述功能，其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的模块及算法步骤，本申请能够以硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。
图28给出了一种通信装置2800的结构示意图。通信装置2800可用于实现上述方法实施例中描述的方法，可以参见上述方法实施例中的说明。所述通信装置2800可以是芯片，网络设备(如基站)，或，终端设备。
所述通信装置2800包括一个或多个处理器2801。所述处理器2801可以是通用处理器或者专用处理器等。例如可以是基带处理器、或中央处理器。基带处理器可以用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理，中央处理器可以用于对装置(如，基站、终端、或芯片等)进行控制，执行软件程序，处理软件程序的数据。所述装置可以包括收发单元，用以实现信号的输入(接收)和输出(发送)。例如，装置可以为芯片，所述收发单元可以是芯片的输入和/或输出电路，或者通信接口。所述芯片可以用于终端设备或网络设备(比如基站)。又如，装置可以为终端设备或网络设备(比如基站)，所述收发单元可以为收发器，射频芯片等。
所述通信装置2800包括一个或多个所述处理器2801，所述一个或多个处理器2801可实现图6-图27中任一所示的实施例中网络设备或者终端设备的方法。
在一种可能的设计中，所述通信装置2800包括用于接收来自第一接入网设备的第一信息的部件(means)，以及用于基于所述第一信息，在第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于所述第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，将满足所述触发条件的候选SN确定为所述第一目标SN的部件(means)。例如可以通过收发器、或输入/输出电路、或芯片的接口接收所述第一信息。所述第一信息可以参见上述方法实施例中的相关描述。
在一种可能的设计中，所述通信装置2800包括用于确定第一信号质量参数门限值的部件(means)，以及用于向所述终端发送第一信息的部件(means)。例如可以通过收发器、或输入/输出电路、或芯片的接口发送所述第一信息。所述第一信息可以参见上述方法实施例中的相关描述。
在其他设计中，所述通信装置2800还可以包括实现所述图6-图27中任一所示的实施例中网络设备或者终端设备的方法中步骤的部件，具体在此不予赘述。
可选的，处理器2801除了实现图6-图27中的一项或多项所示的实施例的方法，还可以实现其他功能。
可选的，一种设计中，处理器2801也可以包括指令2803，所述指令可以在所述处理器上被运行，使得所述通信装置2800执行上述方法实施例中描述的方法。
在又一种可能的设计中，通信装置2800也可以包括电路，所述电路可以实现前述方法实施例中网络设备或终端设备的功能。
在又一种可能的设计中所述通信装置2800中可以包括一个或多个存储器2802，其上存有程序(也可以是指令或者代码)2804，程序2804可被处理器2801运行，使得通信装置2800执行上述方法实施例中描述的方法。可选地，存储器2802中还可以存储有数据。可选地，处理器2801还可以读取存储器2802中存储的数据(例如，预定义的信息)，该数据可以与程序2804存储在相同的存储地址，该数据也可以与程序1804存储在不同的存储地址。
在又一种可能的设计中，所述通信装置2800还可以包括收发单元2805以及天线2806，或者，包括通信接口。所述收发单元2805可以称为收发机、收发电路、或者收发器等，用于通过天线2806实现装置的收发功能。所述通信接口(图中未示出)，可以用于核心网设备和网络设备，或是，网络设备和网络设备之间的通信。可选的，该通信接口可以为有线通信的接口，比如光纤通信的接口。
所述处理器2801可以称为处理单元，对装置(比如终端或者基站)进行控制。
此外，由于本申请实施例中所描述收发单元2805进行的发送或接收是在处理单元(处理器2801)的控制之下，因此，本申请实施例中也可以将发送或接收的动作描述为处理单元(处理器2801)执行的，并不影响本领域技术人员对方案的理解。
本申请实施例可以根据上述方法示例对通信装置进行功能模块的划分，例如，可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块，也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现，也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。需要说明的是，本申请实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。
在采用集成的单元的情况下，图29示出了一种通信装置的可能的结构示意图，该通信装置可以为接入网设备或者用于接入网设备的芯片，所述接入网设备可以执行上述方法实施例中的第一接入网节点、MN或第一MN的操作。该通信装置2900包括：处理单元2901、第一收发单元2902和第二收发单元2903。该第一收发单元2902可以为基站和终端间的收发单元，该第一收发单元2902可以由第一收发器实现。该第一收发器可以包括和收发机和天线，用于通信装置2900与终端之间通信。该第二收发单元2903可以为基站和基站间的收发单元，该第二收发单元2903可以由第二收发器实现。该第二收发器可以为通信接口，用于通信装置2900与其他网络设备之间通信。
示例性的，处理单元2901用于对上述通信装置2900的动作进行控制管理，用于执行上述实施例中由第一接入网节点、MN或第一MN进行的处理，可选的，若通信装置2900包括存储单元，则处理单元2901还可以执行存储在存储器中的程序或指令，以使得通信装置2900实现上述任一实施例所涉及的方法和功能。可选的，处理单元2901可以用于确定上述实施例中的第一信号质量参数门限值、触发条件、第二信号质量参数门限值、候选SN，以及候选PSCell，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。例如，处理单元2901可以用于执行图6中的步骤S600，或图15中的步骤S1501，或，图24中的步骤S2401，或，图26中的步骤S2601。
示例性的，第一收发单元2902可以用于执行例如图6或或图7或图8或图9或图10中的S601，或，图11中的S601和S611，或，图12中的步骤S1205，或，图13中的S1309，或，图14中的S1407，或，图15或图16或图17或图18或19或20中 的S1501，或，图20中的S1501和S1511，或，图21中的S2105，或，图22中的S2209，或，图23中的S2307，或，图24中的S2402，或，图26中的S2602，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。其中，上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述，在此不再赘述。
第二收发单元2903可以用于执行例如图7中的S604，图10中的S607和S610，或，图12中的步骤S1201、S1204、S1209和S1211，或，图13中的S1301、S1304、S1305、S1308、S1313和S1315，或，图14中的S1402、S1403、S1406、S1411、S1413和S1415，或，图16中的S1504，或，图19中的S1507和S1510，或，图21中的S2101、S2104、S2109和S2111，或，图22中的S2201、S2204、S2205、S2208、S2213和S2215，或，图23中的S2302、S2303、S2306、S2311、S2313和S2315，或，图25中的S2405，或，图27中的S2605，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。其中，上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述，在此不再赘述。
示例性的，在硬件实现上，可以由一个处理器执行处理单元2901的功能，可以由通信接口执行第一收发单元2902的功能，由收发器(发送器/接收器)执行第二收发单元2903的功能。其中，处理单元2901可以以硬件形式内嵌于或独立于通信装置的处理器中，也可以以软件形式存储于通信装置2900的存储器中，以便于处理器调用执行以上各个功能单元对应的操作。该通信装置2900的硬件结构如图28所示，上述图28涉及的各部件的所有相关内容的描述均可以援引到该通信装置2900对应部件的功能描述，在此不再赘述。
在采用集成的单元的情况下，图30示出了一种通信装置的可能的结构示意图，该通信装置可以为上述实施例中的终端，或者用于终端的装置，例如芯片。该通信装置3000包括：处理单元3001、收发单元3002。
示例性的，处理单元3001用于对上述通信装置3000的动作进行控制管理，用于执行上述实施例中由终端进行的处理操作，可选的，若通信装置3000包括存储单元，则处理单元3001还可以执行存储在存储器中的程序或指令，以使得通信装置3000实现上述任一实施例所涉及的方法和功能。该处理单元3001可以用于执行图6中的S603，或，图8中的S605，或，图9中的S606，或，图11中的S613和S614，或，图12中的S1207、S1212或S1213，或，图13中的S1311、S1316或S1317，或，图14中的S1409、S1416或S1417，或，图15中的S1503，或，图17中的S1505，或，图18中的S1506，或，图21中的S2107、S2112或S2113，或，图22中的S2211、S2216或S2217，或，图23中的S2309、S2316或S2317，或，图24中的S2404，或，图26中的S2604，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
示例性的，收发单元3002可以用于执行图6中的S602，或，图11中的S602和S612，或，图12中的步骤S1206、S1208和S1210，或，图13中的S1310、S1312和S1314，或，图14中的S1408、S1410和S1414，或，图15中的S1502，或，图20中的S1502和S1512，或，图21中的S2106、S2108和S2110，或，图22中的S2210、S2212和S2214，或，图23中的S2308、S2310和S314，或，图24中的S2403，或，图26中的S2603，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。其中，上述方法实施例涉 及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述，在此不再赘述。
示例性的，该通信装置3000可以为图5所示的通信装置，处理单元3001可以为图5中的处理器501、收发单元3002可以为图5中的收发器503。可选的，该通信装置3000还可以包括存储器，该存储器用于存储通信装置3000执行上文所提供的任一通信方法所对应的程序代码和数据。上述图5涉及的各部件的所有相关内容的描述均可以援引到该通信装置3000对应部件的功能描述，在此不再赘述。
上述各个装置实施例中的终端设备与网络设备可以与方法实施例中的终端设备或者网络设备完全对应，由相应的模块或者单元执行相应的步骤，例如，当该装置以芯片的方式实现时，上述接收单元可以是该芯片用于从其他芯片或者装置接收信号的接口电路。以上用于发送的单元是一种该装置的接口电路，用于向其他装置发送信号，例如，当该装置以芯片的方式实现时，上述发送单元是该芯片用于向其他芯片或者装置发送信号的接口电路。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置，该通信装置包括处理器，该处理器用于执行计算机执行指令，以支持终端设备实现图6至图27中任一实施例中的通信方法。可选的，该通信装置还可以包括收发器以及存储器，收发器，用于收发信息，或者用于与其他网元通信；存储器，用于存储计算机执行指令。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置，该通信装置包括处理器，该处理器，用于执行计算机执行指令，以支持接入网设备例如基站实现图6至图27中任一实施例中的通信方法。可选的，该通信装置还可以包括收发器以及存储器，收发器，用于收发信息，或者用于与其他网元通信；存储器，用于存储计算机执行指令。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机存储介质，该计算机存储介质中存储有计算机程序代码，当上述处理器执行该计算机程序代码时，电子设备执行图6至图27中任一实施例中的通信方法。
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机程序产品，当该计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行图6至图27中任一实施例中的通信方法。
本申请实施例还提供了一种通信装置，该装置可以以芯片的产品形态存在，该装置的结构中包括处理器和接口电路，该处理器用于通过接收电路与其它装置通信，使得该装置执行上述图6至图27中任一实施例中的通信方法。
本申请实施例还提供了一种通信系统，包括终端和接入网设备，该终端和接入网设备可以执行上述图6至图27中任一实施例中的通信方法。
结合本申请公开内容所描述的方法或者算法的步骤可以硬件的方式来实现，也可以是由处理器执行软件指令的方式来实现。软件指令可以由相应的软件模块组成，软件模块可以被存放于随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory，RAM)、闪存、可擦除可编程只读存储器(Erasable Programmable ROM，EPROM)、电可擦可编程只读存储器(Electrically EPROM，EEPROM)、寄存器、硬盘、移动硬盘、只读光盘(CD-ROM)或者本领域熟知的任何其它形式的存储介质中。一种示例性的存储介质耦合至处理器，从而使处理器能够从该存储介质读取信息，且可向该存储介质写入信息。当然，存储介质也可以是处理器的组成部分。处理器和存储介质可以位于ASIC中。另外，该ASIC可以位于核心网接口设备中。当然，处理器和存储介质也可以作为分立组件存在于核 心网接口设备中。
本领域技术人员应该可以意识到，在上述一个或多个示例中，本申请所描述的功能可以用硬件、软件、固件或它们的任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时，可以将这些功能存储在计算机可读介质中或者作为计算机可读介质上的一个或多个指令或代码进行传输。计算机可读介质包括计算机存储介质和通信介质，其中通信介质包括便于从一个地方向另一个地方传送计算机程序的任何介质。存储介质可以是通用或专用计算机能够存取的任何可用介质。
以上所述的具体实施方式，对本申请的目的、技术方案和有益效果进行了进一步详细说明，所应理解的是，以上所述仅为本申请的具体实施方式而已，并不用于限定本申请的保护范围，凡在本申请的技术方案的基础之上，所做的任何修改、等同替换、改进等，均应包括在本申请的保护范围之内。

Claims (32)

  1. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    终端接收来自第一接入网设备的第一信息，所述第一信息包括第一信号质量参数门限值和触发条件，所述触发条件为终端变更至第一目标辅节点SN或添加所述第一目标SN的触发条件；
    所述终端基于所述第一信息，在第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于所述第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，将满足所述触发条件的候选SN确定为所述第一目标SN；所述第一小区为所述第一接入网设备管理的小区。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    在所述第一小区的信号质量参数小于所述第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，所述终端执行以下一项或多项：
    所述终端确定停止条件SN的添加或变更的判断；所述条件SN的添加或变更的判断包括所述终端判断至少一个候选SN是否满足所述触发条件；或者，
    所述终端忽视所述至少一个候选SN的辅小区组SCG配置；或者，
    所述终端忽视所述触发条件；或者，
    所述终端删除所述至少一个候选SN的SCG配置；或者，
    所述终端删除所述触发条件。
  3. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述第一小区的信号质量参数小于所述第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，所述方法还包括：
    所述终端将满足所述触发条件的候选SN确定为目标主节点MN，且，所述终端释放所述第一接入网设备；或者，
    所述终端将满足所述触发条件的候选SN确定为目标MN，且，所述终端将所述第一接入网设备切换为所述第一目标SN。
  4. 根据权利要求1-3中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述终端接收来自所述第一接入网设备的第一消息，所述第一消息用于指示所述终端进行SN的添加或SN的变更；所述第一消息包括第二目标SN的SCG配置；
    所述终端停止条件SN添加或条件SN变更的流程，执行SN的添加或SN的变更流程。
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    在所述终端与所述第二目标SN接入成功的情况下，所述终端删除至少一个候选SN的SCG配置。
  6. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    第一接入网设备确定第一信号质量参数门限值，所述第一信号质量参数门限值用于终端确定第一小区的信号质量情况；所述第一小区为所述第一接入网设备管理的小区；
    所述第一接入网设备向所述终端发送第一信息，所述第一信息包括所述第一信号质量参数门限值和触发条件，所述触发条件为所述终端变更至目标辅节点SN或添加所述目标SN的触发条件。
  7. 根据权利要求6所述方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一接入网设备分别向至少一个候选SN发送第一消息，所述第一消息用于请求所述候选SN为所述终端分配无线资源，所述第一消息包括条件SN添加或条件SN变更的指示信息；
    所述第一接入网设备接收来自所述候选SN的第二消息，所述第二消息包括所述候选SN分配的辅小区组SCG配置。
  8. 根据权利要求6或7所述方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一接入网设备分别向第一候选SN发送第三消息，所述第三消息用于指示所述第一候选SN释放所述第一候选SN的SCG配置，所述第一候选SN为至少一个候选SN中除所述目标SN以外的SN。
  9. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    终端接收来自第一接入网设备的第一信息，所述第一信息包括第一信号质量参数门限值和触发条件，所述触发条件为终端变更至第一目标主辅小区PSCell或添加所述第一目标PSCell的触发条件；
    所述终端基于所述第一信息，在第一小区的信号质量参数大于或等于所述第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，将满足所述触发条件的候选PSCell确定为所述第一目标PSCell；所述第一小区为所述第一接入网设备管理的小区。
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    在所述第一小区的信号质量参数小于所述第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，所述终端执行以下一项或多项：
    所述终端确定停止条件PSCell的添加或变更的判断；所述条件PSCell的添加或变更的判断包括所述终端判断至少一个候选PSCell是否满足所述触发条件；或者，
    所述终端忽视所述至少一个候选PSCell的配置；或者，
    所述终端忽视所述触发条件；或者，
    所述终端删除所述至少一个候选PSCell的配置；或者，
    所述终端删除所述触发条件。
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法，其特征在于，所述至少一个候选PSCell属于第二接入网设备管理的小区，所述第二接入网设备为所述终端变更至所述第一目标PSCell之前，所述终端在双连接通信时的辅节点SN。
  12. 根据权利要求9所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述第一小区的信号质量参数小于所述第一信号质量参数门限值的情况下，所述方法还包括：
    所述终端将满足所述触发条件的候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备确定为目标MN，且，所述终端释放所述第一接入网设备；或者，
    所述终端将满足所述触发条件的候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备确定为目标MN，且，所述终端将所述第一接入网设备切换为目标SN。
  13. 根据权利要求9-12中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述终端接收来自所述第一接入网设备的第一消息，所述第一消息用于指示所述终端进行PSCell的添加或PSCell的变更；所述第一消息包括第二目标PSCell的配置；
    所述终端停止条件PSCell添加或条件PSCell变更的流程，执行PSCell的添加或PSCell的变更流程。
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    在所述终端与所述第二目标PSCell接入成功的情况下，所述终端删除至少一个候选PSCell的配置。
  15. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    第一接入网设备确定第一信号质量参数门限值，所述第一信号质量参数门限值用于终端确定第一小区的信号质量情况；所述第一小区为所述第一接入网设备管理的小区；
    所述第一接入网设备向所述终端发送第一信息，所述第一信息包括所述第一信号质量参数门限值和触发条件，所述触发条件为所述终端变更至目标主辅小区PSCell或添加所述目标PSCell的触发条件。
  16. 根据权利要求15所述方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一接入网设备分别向至少一个候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备发送第一消息，所述第一消息用于请求所述第二接入网设备为所述终端分配无线资源，所述第一消息包括条件PSCell添加或条件PSCell变更的指示信息；
    所述第一接入网设备接收来自所述第二接入网设备的第二消息，所述第二消息包括所述第二接入网设备分配的PSCell的配置。
  17. 根据权利要求16所述方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一接入网设备分别向至少一个第一候选PSCell所属的第二接入网设备发送第三消息，所述第三消息用于指示所述第二接入网设备释放所述第一候选PSCell的配置，所述至少一个候选PSCell包括所述第一候选PSCell，所述第一候选PSCell与所述目标PSCell为不同接入网设备管理的小区。
  18. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    终端接收来自第一主节点MN的第一信息，所述第一信息包括至少一个候选MN的标识，每个候选MN对应的至少一个候选辅节点SN的标识，所述至少一个候选MN的主小区组MCG配置，所述至少一个候选SN的辅小区组SCG配置，以及触发条件；所述触发条件为终端切换至目标MN且变更至目标SN的触发条件，所述触发条件包括第一信号质量参数门限值；
    所述终端确定所述目标MN以及所述目标SN，所述目标MN的信号质量参数以及所述目标SN的信号质量参数的函数的结果大于或等于所述第一信号质量参数门限值。
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的方法，其特征在于，所述触发条件还包括：所述候选MN对应的第一权重，以及所述候选SN对应的第二权重，所述终端确定所述目标MN以及所述目标SN，包括：
    所述终端根据每个候选MN的信号质量参数，该候选MN对应的一个候选SN的信号质量参数，以及所述第一权重和所述第二权重，确定所述候选MN和所述候选SN的信号质量参数的加权和；
    所述终端将所述加权和大于或等于所述第一信号质量参数门限值的候选MN和候选SN，确定为所述目标MN和所述目标SN。
  20. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    第一主节点MN确定触发条件，所述触发条件为终端切换至目标MN且变更至目标辅节点SN的触发条件，所述触发条件包括第一信号质量参数门限值；所述触发条件用于所述终端确定所述目标MN和所述目标SN，所述目标MN的信号质量参数以及所述目标SN的信号质量参数的函数的结果大于或等于所述第一信号质量参数门限值；
    所述第一MN向终端发送第一信息，所述第一信息包括至少一个候选MN的标识，每个候选MN对应的至少一个候选SN的标识，所述至少一个候选MN的主小区组MCG配置，所述至少一个候选SN的辅小区组SCG配置，以及所述触发条件。
  21. 根据权利要求20所述的方法，其特征在于，所述触发条件还包括候选MN对应的第一权重，以及候选SN对应的第二权重。
  22. 根据权利要求20或21所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一MN向第一SN发送第一消息，所述第一消息用于指示所述第一SN不发起条件SN变更，所述第一SN为所述终端变更至所述目标SN之前，所述终端在双连接通信时的辅节点SN。
  23. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    终端接收来自第一主节点MN的第一信息，所述第一信息包括至少一个候选MN的标识，每个候选MN对应的至少一个候选主辅小区PSCell的标识，所述至少一个候选MN的主小区组MCG配置，所述至少一个候选PSCell的配置，以及触发条件；所述触发条件为终端切换至目标MN且变更至目标PSCell的触发条件，所述触发条件包括第一信号质量参数门限值；
    所述终端确定所述目标MN以及所述目标PSCell，所述目标MN的信号质量参数以及所述目标PSCell的信号质量参数的函数的结果大于或等于所述第一信号质量参数门限值。
  24. 根据权利要求23所述的方法，其特征在于，所述触发条件还包括：所述候选MN对应的第一权重，以及所述候选PSCell对应的第二权重，所述终端确定所述目标MN以及所述目标PSCell，包括：
    所述终端根据每个候选MN的信号质量参数，该候选MN对应的一个候选PSCell的信号质量参数，以及所述第一权重和所述第二权重，确定所述候选MN和所述候选PSCell的信号质量参数的加权和；
    所述终端将所述加权和大于或等于所述第一信号质量参数门限值的候选MN和候选PSCell，确定为所述目标MN和所述目标PSCell。
  25. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    第一主节点MN确定触发条件，所述触发条件为终端切换至目标MN且变更至目标主辅小区PSCell的触发条件，所述触发条件包括第一信号质量参数门限值；所述触发条件用于所述终端确定所述目标MN和所述目标PSCell，所述目标MN的信号质量参数以及所述目标PSCell的信号质量参数的函数的结果大于或等于所述第一信号质量参数门限值；
    所述第一MN向终端发送第一信息，所述第一信息包括至少一个候选MN的标识，每个候选MN对应的至少一个候选PSCell的标识，所述至少一个候选MN的主小区组 MCG配置，所述至少一个候选PSCell的配置，以及所述触发条件。
  26. 根据权利要求25所述的方法，其特征在于，所述触发条件还包括候选MN对应的第一权重，以及候选PSCell对应的第二权重。
  27. 根据权利要求25或26所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一MN向所述第一SN发送第一消息，所述第一消息用于指示所述第一SN不发起条件PSCell变更，所述第一SN为所述终端变更至所述目标SN之前，所述终端在双连接通信时的辅节点SN。
  28. 根据权利要求1-27中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述信号质量参数包括：参考信号接收功率RSRP、参考信号接收质量RSRQ、接收信号强度指示RSSI，以及信号与干扰加噪声比SINR中的一种或多种。
  29. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置包括收发单元和处理单元，所述收发单元，用于收发信息，或者用于与其他网元通信；所述处理单元，用于执行计算机程序指令，以实现如权利要求1-28中任一项所述的通信方法。
  30. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置包括：
    处理器，用于执行指令，以实现如权利要求1-28中任一项所述的通信方法。
  31. 一种计算机存储介质，所述计算机存储介质中具有计算机程序代码，其特征在于，当所述计算机程序代码在处理器上运行时，使得所述处理器执行如权利要求1-28中任一项所述的通信方法。
  32. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，用于执行如权利要求1-28中任一项所述的通信方法。
PCT/CN2019/109549 2019-09-30 2019-09-30 一种通信方法和装置 WO2021062679A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2019/109549 WO2021062679A1 (zh) 2019-09-30 2019-09-30 一种通信方法和装置
CN201980097030.XA CN113950853B (zh) 2019-09-30 2019-09-30 一种通信方法和装置

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2019/109549 WO2021062679A1 (zh) 2019-09-30 2019-09-30 一种通信方法和装置

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021062679A1 true WO2021062679A1 (zh) 2021-04-08

Family

ID=75336330

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/109549 WO2021062679A1 (zh) 2019-09-30 2019-09-30 一种通信方法和装置

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN113950853B (zh)
WO (1) WO2021062679A1 (zh)

Cited By (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023045851A1 (zh) * 2021-09-22 2023-03-30 维沃移动通信有限公司 双连接通信方法和设备
WO2023066089A1 (zh) * 2021-10-22 2023-04-27 华为技术有限公司 通信方法和通信装置
WO2023109687A1 (zh) * 2021-12-13 2023-06-22 维沃移动通信有限公司 条件小区变换方法、装置、ue及网络侧设备
WO2023201759A1 (zh) * 2022-04-22 2023-10-26 北京小米移动软件有限公司 成功PScell添加或更换报告的上报方法、装置
WO2023201760A1 (zh) * 2022-04-22 2023-10-26 北京小米移动软件有限公司 PScell添加或改变的成功报告的记录方法、装置
WO2023236060A1 (zh) * 2022-06-07 2023-12-14 北京小米移动软件有限公司 一种失败恢复方法及其装置
AU2021287836B2 (en) * 2020-06-10 2024-01-04 China Mobile Communication Co., Ltd Research Institute Information Transmission Method, Information Reception Method and Apparatuses

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN117014901A (zh) * 2022-04-28 2023-11-07 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Mr-dc的全量配置方法、装置、计算机设备及可读介质
WO2024031331A1 (en) * 2022-08-09 2024-02-15 Apple Inc. Ue handling of sn in case of conditional mn and sn

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103906147A (zh) * 2012-12-25 2014-07-02 电信科学技术研究院 一种确定目标小区的方法和设备
CN104284434A (zh) * 2013-07-05 2015-01-14 株式会社Ntt都科摩 一种干扰协调方法及基站
CN105323807A (zh) * 2014-08-01 2016-02-10 电信科学技术研究院 一种进行切换的方法和设备
CN106031292A (zh) * 2014-01-17 2016-10-12 三星电子株式会社 用于双连接性中的特定辅小区选择的处置的方法和系统
CN106304358A (zh) * 2016-07-29 2017-01-04 广东欧珀移动通信有限公司 辅成员载波更换方法、装置及移动终端
US20190297537A1 (en) * 2018-03-22 2019-09-26 Asustek Computer Inc. Method and apparatus for beam failure handling in a wireless communication system

Family Cites Families (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2017113296A1 (zh) * 2015-12-31 2017-07-06 华为技术有限公司 数据传输的方法及装置
CN110198550B (zh) * 2018-02-24 2021-01-08 维沃移动通信有限公司 一种辅小区组维护方法、终端设备及网络节点
CN110198545B (zh) * 2018-02-24 2021-12-14 维沃移动通信有限公司 一种辅小区组添加方法、终端设备及主节点
CN110290560A (zh) * 2018-03-19 2019-09-27 维沃移动通信有限公司 资源选择方法、用户设备和网络侧设备

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103906147A (zh) * 2012-12-25 2014-07-02 电信科学技术研究院 一种确定目标小区的方法和设备
CN104284434A (zh) * 2013-07-05 2015-01-14 株式会社Ntt都科摩 一种干扰协调方法及基站
CN106031292A (zh) * 2014-01-17 2016-10-12 三星电子株式会社 用于双连接性中的特定辅小区选择的处置的方法和系统
CN105323807A (zh) * 2014-08-01 2016-02-10 电信科学技术研究院 一种进行切换的方法和设备
CN106304358A (zh) * 2016-07-29 2017-01-04 广东欧珀移动通信有限公司 辅成员载波更换方法、装置及移动终端
US20190297537A1 (en) * 2018-03-22 2019-09-26 Asustek Computer Inc. Method and apparatus for beam failure handling in a wireless communication system

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
NSN, NOKIA CORPORATION: "Functionalities in MeNB and SeNB", 3GPP DRAFT; R2-142471 (MENB AND SENB FUNCTIONALITY), 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG2, no. Seoul, Korea; 20140519 - 20140523, 18 May 2014 (2014-05-18), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France, XP050790333 *

Cited By (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
AU2021287836B2 (en) * 2020-06-10 2024-01-04 China Mobile Communication Co., Ltd Research Institute Information Transmission Method, Information Reception Method and Apparatuses
WO2023045851A1 (zh) * 2021-09-22 2023-03-30 维沃移动通信有限公司 双连接通信方法和设备
WO2023066089A1 (zh) * 2021-10-22 2023-04-27 华为技术有限公司 通信方法和通信装置
WO2023109687A1 (zh) * 2021-12-13 2023-06-22 维沃移动通信有限公司 条件小区变换方法、装置、ue及网络侧设备
WO2023201759A1 (zh) * 2022-04-22 2023-10-26 北京小米移动软件有限公司 成功PScell添加或更换报告的上报方法、装置
WO2023201760A1 (zh) * 2022-04-22 2023-10-26 北京小米移动软件有限公司 PScell添加或改变的成功报告的记录方法、装置
WO2023236060A1 (zh) * 2022-06-07 2023-12-14 北京小米移动软件有限公司 一种失败恢复方法及其装置

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN113950853A (zh) 2022-01-18
CN113950853B (zh) 2023-03-10

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2021062679A1 (zh) 一种通信方法和装置
KR102294942B1 (ko) QoS 처리 방법 및 기기
EP3051876B1 (en) Small cell switching method, enb and computer storage medium
EP3086589B1 (en) Core network device, access network device, data distribution method and system
CN112637906B (zh) 寻呼的方法和装置
KR102214428B1 (ko) 통신 방법 및 장치
WO2020001317A1 (zh) V2x通信方法、装置及系统
KR102280393B1 (ko) 다중연결 통신 방법 및 디바이스
WO2020164418A1 (zh) 一种测量方法、终端设备及网络设备
US9706461B2 (en) Method of handover in device to device communication, base station and communication system
WO2020125479A1 (zh) 无线网络通信方法、基站、终端及通信装置
US20170013499A1 (en) Terminal capability control method, terminal, enb and computer storage medium
EP3024281B1 (en) Method and apparatus for fast scanning for wireless lan ap search having low network load
CN108924961B (zh) 终端能力的协商方法及装置
RU2687162C1 (ru) Способ передачи данных, точка доступа и станция
US20170223568A1 (en) Method and Apparatus for Triggering Buffer Status Report and Communications System
CN112889320A (zh) 一种寻呼方法及装置
WO2014117335A1 (zh) 上行传输方法、基站和用户设备
WO2017156973A1 (zh) 用于d2d通信的方法和d2d设备
CN108282799B (zh) 一种测量配置方法、装置、网元及系统
CN112866982A (zh) 一种寻呼方法及装置
EP3328154A1 (en) Measurement reporting method for wireless local area network (wlan), and related device
WO2016119441A1 (zh) 业务迁移方法及装置
EP3697163A1 (en) Random access method, device and storage medium for communication device
WO2021088006A1 (zh) 通信方法和通信装置

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19947972

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19947972

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1